Landmark SynTool 2003.

12

SynTool User Guide Contents

Introduction ................................................................................................. 1

Data Access and Integration ............................................................................ 2

Settings Prior to Running SynTool .................................................................. 3

Initialization File (.mirarc) ............................................................................ 3

Editing .mirarc ............................................................................................. 16

.mirarc Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 18

Notes ............................................................................................................ 18

Curve Units, measurement system ............................................................ 20

Datums .......................................................................................................... 22

SynTool Objects ............................................................................................... 27

SynTool Object Types ................................................................................ 27

Curve Family ...................................................................................................... 36

Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts .................................................................... 38

Creating a Synthetic .................................................................................... 38

Model Wavelets ............................................................................................ 40

Wavelet Extraction ....................................................................................... 42

Wellbore Extraction ..................................................................................... 43

Deviated Displays ....................................................................................... 43

Getting Started ........................................................................................... 46

Starting SynTool ................................................................................................ 47

Selecting a Well List and Well ......................................................................... 48

November 2003 Contents i

Index
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark2

Selecting Active and Reference Checkshots ................................................. 50

Selecting Seismic Project for Time Datum Reference ................................... 51

Specifying Startup Parameters ....................................................................... 52

Startup Parameters ...................................................................................... 52

Saving a Session File and Exiting SynTool ............................................... 62

Working With the Interface .............................................................. 64

Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons ........................................................ 65

Pulldown Menus .......................................................................................... 65

Popup menus ............................................................................................... 65

Toolbar Icons ............................................................................................... 67

Working with Panes .......................................................................................... 70

Panes Main Menu ......................................................................................... 71

Panes Control Menu .................................................................................... 74

Expert Keys ........................................................................................................ 76

Working with Views and Display ...................................................................... 78

Quick Access ................................................................................................ 78

View Preferences Parameters ..................................................................... 79

Grid Color Parameters ................................................................................. 81

Time Parameters .......................................................................................... 82

Working With Picks .......................................................................................... 83

Display Preferences Parameters ................................................................ 83

Pick Labels Options ..................................................................................... 84

Pick Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 85

Workflows ....................................................................................................... 88

ii Contents November 2003

Index
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

Adding Seismic Data ........................................................................................ 89

Inserting SeisWorks Seismic ...................................................................... 89

Inserting SEG-Y file Seismic ....................................................................... 91

Seismic Pane Menus .................................................................................... 91

Viewing a SEG-Y Report File (.lst) ............................................................. 95

SEG Y Format .............................................................................................. 95

SEG Y File (.sgy) Troubleshooting ............................................................ 97

Extracting Seismic ........................................................................................... 98

Mixed Phase Extraction Technique ............................................................ 98

Autocorrelation Wavelet Extraction Technique ........................................ 99

Setting Default Extraction Parameters ....................................................... 100

Launching SeisWell ..................................................................................... 102

Extracting Wellbore Seismic ....................................................................... 102

Extracting a Seismic Wavelet ..................................................................... 105

Seismic Troubleshooting ............................................................................ 106

Working with Database Synthetics .................................................................. 107

Uses for database synthetics ..................................................................... 107

Inserting an database synthetic as an overlay .......................................... 108

Synthetic Correlation Options ......................................................................... 109

Inserting a Synthetic Correlation Pane ...................................................... 109

Example Correlation .................................................................................... 110

Synthetics .......................................................................................................... 113

Setting Synthetic and Database Synthetic View Parameters .................. 113

Example synthetic ........................................................................................ 117

Viewing SynTool Synthetics in SeisWorks ............................................... 118

November 2003 Contents iii

Index
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark2

Comparing Edited Synthetics ..................................................................... 119

Synthetic Troubleshooting .......................................................................... 119

TIme Depth Scale ............................................................................................... 124

Time/Depth Scale Menu ............................................................................... 124

Applying a Bulk Shift .................................................................................. 133

Working with Curves ......................................................................................... 134

Show Database Log ..................................................................................... 134

Setting Curve View Menu ............................................................................ 134

Editing Curves .............................................................................................. 139

Saving an Edited Curve .............................................................................. 144

Discard Edits ............................................................................................... 147

Scale Location ............................................................................................. 147

Combining Two Log Runs of the Same Curve ......................................... 148

Highlighting curves ...................................................................................... 149

Change Input Curves Parameters .............................................................. 149

Copying and Pasting From Curves in Other Wells .................................. 151

Defining Replacement Velocity with a Linear Function or TD values ..... 151

Processes ....................................................................................................... 152

Edit Process List .............................................................................................. 153

Checkshots ........................................................................................................ 155

SynTool Checkshot Prep ............................................................................. 155

Applying checkshots ................................................................................... 156

Editing checkshots ...................................................................................... 157

Checkshot Process Parameters ................................................................. 158

iv Contents November 2003

Index
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

Checkshot Table Editor ............................................................................... 160

Checkshot Diagnostic Parameters ............................................................. 161

Saving Checkshots ...................................................................................... 165

Checkshot Diagnostics View Parameters ................................................. 165

TD Tables for Time-to-Depth Conversion ................................................. 168

Selecting a Time-Depth Table for Checkshot Corrections ...................... 169

Viewing Different Checkshot Pair Effects ................................................. 169

Changing Synthetics using Pseudo-Checkshots .................................... 170

Checkshot Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 172

AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Process ......................................................... 174

AGC Parameters ........................................................................................... 174

TV (Time Variant) Filter Process ..................................................................... 175

TV Filter Parameters .................................................................................... 177

Trapezoid Parameters .................................................................................. 179

Ricker Parameters ........................................................................................ 181

Klauder Parameters ..................................................................................... 182

Butterworth Parameters .............................................................................. 183

ASCII Filter Parameters ............................................................................... 185

Database Filter Parameters ......................................................................... 187

Multiplier Process ............................................................................................. 189

Multiplier Parameters ................................................................................... 189

Median Filter Process ...................................................................................... 190

Median Filter Parameters ............................................................................ 190

RC (Reflection Coefficient) Process ............................................................... 191

RC Process Parameters .............................................................................. 191

November 2003 Contents v

Index
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark2

Change Polarity Process .................................................................................. 193

Impedance Process ........................................................................................... 194

(Show) Impedance ...................................................................................... 194

Acoustic Impedance Parameters ................................................................ 194

Elastic Impedance Parameters ................................................................... 194

Using Elastic Impedance ............................................................................. 195

TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process .............................................. 197

TVD Correction Parameters ........................................................................ 197

Editing TVD Data ......................................................................................... 198

Correcting Bad Values in a TVD Survey ................................................... 200

User Defined Transform Process .................................................................... 201

User Defined Transform Parameters .......................................................... 201

Unit Conversion ................................................................................................. 205

Range Enforcement Process ........................................................................... 206

Range Enforcement Parameters ................................................................. 206

Rotation Process ............................................................................................... 207

Phase Rotation Parameters ........................................................................ 207

Time Shift Process ............................................................................................ 208

Time Shift Parameters ................................................................................. 208

Session Files and Templates ........................................................ 210

Session Files ...................................................................................................... 211

SeisWorks Projects ...................................................................................... 212

Measurement Systems ................................................................................ 213

Templates ........................................................................................................... 214

vi Contents November 2003

Index
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

Working With Files and Templates .................................................................. 215

Saving a Session File .................................................................................. 215

Opening a Session File ............................................................................... 216

Opening a Session File as a Template ...................................................... 216

Saving a Template ....................................................................................... 217

Opening a Template .................................................................................... 217

Sharing Templates and Session Files ............................................................ 219

Renaming OpenWorks Projects ....................................................................... 220

Importing SEGY ................................................................................................. 222

Importing a SEGY file from Seis2D ............................................................ 222

Importing SEGY files from Seis3D ............................................................. 226

SeisWell ............................................................................................................ 232

Overview ............................................................................................................. 233

Launching SeisWell ........................................................................................... 234

SeisWell Seismic File Selection Parameters ............................................. 234

Launching SeisWell From a SeisWorks Seismic Pane ............................. 235

SeisWell Wavelet Parameters ..................................................................... 236

Scanning and Displaying the Data ............................................................. 237

Viewing the Cross Section .......................................................................... 240

Picking the Extraction Location ................................................................. 241

Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet ........................................................... 242

Using the Wavelet Spectra Window ........................................................... 244

Wavelet Editor Parameters .......................................................................... 245

Saving the Wavelet to the Database ........................................................... 247

November 2003 Contents vii

Index
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark2

SeisWell Menubar ........................................................................................ 247

Appendix ......................................................................................................... 258

Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project .................................................................. 259

Granting Project Access ............................................................................. 263

Adding and Setting the Interpreter ............................................................ 266

Printing in SynTool ............................................................................................ 267

Print ............................................................................................................... 267

Print Troubleshooting .................................................................................. 278

Table Editor ....................................................................................................... 279

Using SynTool’s Table Editor ..................................................................... 279

Table Editor Keyboard Usage ..................................................................... 280

Tips and Shortcuts ........................................................................................... 282

Interrupting Screen Drawing ...................................................................... 282

Moving Windows ......................................................................................... 282

Basic Unix Commands ............................................................................... 282

Operating System Shortcuts ....................................................................... 284

viii Contents November 2003

Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Introduction

SynTool is Landmark’s synthetic seismogram application. Using

SynTool you can interactively customize a display to best illustrate the
relationships between geologic and geophysical events.

SynTool is used to tie time interpretation with wells via a one-

dimensional synthetic seismogram, thus matching time data with depth
data.

SynTool writes to the OpenWorks database or to ascii files. SynTool

can also plot to a color electrostatic Versatec and HP650C through
CGM and postscript languages as well as print to a monochrome HP
laser printer. Support is also provided for various other printers.

This chapter provides an overview of the SynTool application.

• Data Access and Integration

• Settings Prior to Running SynTool

• SynTool Objects

• Curve Family

• Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts

1 Introduction: December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Data Access and Integration

SynTool accepts well and curve data from the OpenWorks database and
reads seismic data from SeisWorks or from SEG Y files. SynTool then
processes the well and seismic data to output synthetic seismograms
and time-depth tables. The synthetics are made available through
OpenWorks to applications such as SeisWorks, PetroWorks, and
StratWorks. A dephasing operator can also be saved during a SeisWell
wavelet extraction and used by Poststack. The time-depth tables are
made available through OpenWorks to applications such as TDQ.

Syntool Read/Write Data Types

Data Type Read From... Write To...

log curves OpenWorks OpenWorks or ASCII files (time or depth)

tops OpenWorks None

checkshot tables OpenWorks or manual entry OpenWorks

TVD table OpenWorks or manual entry OpenWorks

TD table OpenWorks OpenWorks and ASCII file

wavelets ASCII file and OpenWorks ASCII file and OpenWorks

synthetic OpenWorks (including synthetics saved as OpenWorks, ASCII file (time or depth), and
SEG Y files) SEG Y file

tops report None ASCII file

checkshot report ASCII file (through a text editor) ASCII file

seismic data SEG Y file, SeisWorks, SynTool synthetics SEG Y file; SeisWorks .3dv file
saved as SEG Y, bricked (.bri) and
compressed (.cmp) seismic data files

December 2003 Introduction: Data Access and Integration 2

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Settings Prior to Running SynTool

Initialization File (.mirarc)

The initialization file contains information that customizes the SynTool
application. This file is called .mirarc. You can read the .mirarc file
without running SynTool by typing more .mirarc in an xterm
window from your home directory.

Initialization File Content

The .mirarc initialization file contains the following:

• MiraSystem Variables parameters that affect the SynTool

application

• SynTool Variables initialization parameters for SynTool

• Printer Variable proportional or fixed print font type

• PrintSetup Variables printer margins, page setup, title block

information

• CGM Variables CGM font sizes, page size, dpi (used when
printing directly to a file; not required for autorouting
configurations

• OpenWorks Variables OpenWorks Curve Aliases

• GeneralTransform Variable equations for the User Defined

Transform process

Each section contains related variable=value settings, which you can

customize manually by editing the file or by changing a dialog box
item. However, some of the variable settings are read/write by
SynTool—the variables are placed in the initialization file
automatically by SynTool and changed automatically by SynTool.

Variables you may see in your initialization file that are not listed are
created automatically and do not need to be edited.

The .mirarc initialization file resides in your home directory ($HOME)

by default or in the path specified by the EditMiraInit= variable
(page 7). An example of an EditMiraInit= entry might look like:

3 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

EditMiraInit=textedit
/home/<hostname>/<username>/.mirarc

where textedit is the executable for the text editor/viewer you

will use to edit or view the .mirarc file. If the file does not
appear in the text/editor viewer, you may need to provide the
entire path to the executable.

Only edit variables that are shown in italics.

When editing the .mirarc file, make sure the variable you want to use is
not commented out by a colon (;) at the beginning of the variable.

Editing certain variables require you to restart SynTool.

Read the description field next to each editable variable in italics to find out
which variables require you to close or restart SynTool.

You may want to keep a copy of your customized .mirarc file in another
directory to avoid having to “recustomize” it should your original
.mirarc file get deleted, or overwritten.

When you select File ➛ Edit .mirarc, the .mirarc initialization file
appears in window according to what you have set for the
EditMiraInit= variable.

Color Variable Values

SynTool uses the OpenWorks color dictionary for display color used in
the application. The table below shows the OpenWorks colors/values
used in SynTool.

Color Values
Color Name Value Color Name Value Color Name Value

Screen Foreground 0-63 gold 22 yellow2 46

Screen Background 0-63 coral 23 gold1 47

Black 0 orange 24 gray57 48

White 1 firebrick 25 MediumOrchid1 49

magenta 2 salmon 26 tomato1 50

red 3 DarkOrchid 27 pink1 51

yellow 4 VioletRed 28 pink 52

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 4

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Color Values
Color Name Value Color Name Value Color Name Value
green 5 OrangeRed 29 purple3 53

cyan 6 orchid 30 MediumOrchid 54

blue 7 plum 31 SpringGreen3 55

gray 8 plum1 32 LightSalmon3 56

LightGray 9 gray20 33 burlywood3 57

DimGray 10 DodgerBlue1 34 SpringGreen4 58

navy 11 LavenderBlush 35 wheat3 59

SlateBlue 12 green4 36 plum3 60

CadetBlue 13 orchid1 37 yellow1 61

turquoise 14 firebrick4 38 gray30 62

MediumAquamarine 15 gold2 39 orchid3 63

YellowGreen 16 magenta1 40

ForestGreen 17 tomato3 41

DarkGreen 18 thistle2 42

sienna 19 tomato 43

goldenrod 20 pink2 44

tan 21 DeepSkyBlue1 45

Some colors will not print well on color hardcopy devices due to
dithering.

To get the best hardcopy results, use bright colors and black and white.
Avoid dark colors and grays.

Color for curves and other database objects are defined in the
OpenWorks Curve Dictionary.

5 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

BK
0 11 53 18 24 2 3 38

33 13 27 17 20 40 29 25

62 7 28 58 39 30 43 41

10 12 54 36 47 49 50 19

48 34 63 55 22 37 23 56

8 45 60 15 46 32 26 57

9 14 44 16 61 42 31 59

1 6 51 5 4 35 52 21
FG

OpenWorks Color Palette and Corresponding SynTool Color Values

BK and FG on the color palette refer to the colors for the variables
ScreenBackClr= and ScreenForeClr= respectively, in the .mirarc file
(page 8). In the above example, these variables are set to black for the
screen background color (BK) and white for the screen foreground
color (FG).

In the color selection popup list in all dialog boxes for the View
Options menu option, these variables correspond to BG (screen
background color) and FG (screen foreground color). You should avoid
selecting a color for an object if the letters BG are in front of the color
name as you may not be able to see the object on display.

Initialization File Variables

The following sections contain examples of variable settings you might
see in the .mirarc initialization file. Only edit variables shown in italics.

A Word About Variables in the .mirarc Initialization File

Variables shown in italics can be changed by editing the initialization file.

All other variables are under SynTool control and are placed in the
initialization file as needed by SynTool. Do not edit these variables.
Variables are also case sensitive!

MiraSystem Variables

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 6

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

MiraSystem Variables
Variable Description Defaults

CalcApp= Command executable for the application that will SunOS and Solaris
be started when you select File ➛ Calculator. CalcApp=calctool
SGI and IBM
CalcApp=xcalc

CommandClr= [0..63] color used for drawing pane borders, pane CommandClr=9
menu buttons, minimize/maximize buttons, and
the application window space not occupied.
(close session and reopen to activate)

DepthScale= Last session’s depth scale [in,cm] DepthScale=in

EditMiraInit= Text editor for the .mirarc initialization file. TIP: EditMiraInit=<program>
Set this variable to use the same program used by <path to .mirarc>
the FileViewer= variable. The .mirarc resides in
your home directory by default.

ErrorForeClr= [0..63] foreground color for error window text ErrorForeClr=1

(close session and reopen to activate)

ErrorBackClr= [0..63] background color for error window text. ErrorBackClr=3

(close session and reopen to activate)

FileViewer= File viewer executable (used for all reports), for SunOS and Solaris
example, checkshots, table edits, TVD, etc. FileViewer=textedit
SGI
FileViewer=ieditor
IBM
FileViewer=xterm -e vi

FixedFont= Fixed Screen Font used in table editors (exit and SunOS, SGI, and IBM
restart SynTool to activate). There should be no FixedFont=adobe-helvetica-
spaces in the variable definition at right. b*-r*-*--14-140-*-*-*-*-*-*
Solaris
FixedFont=*courier-medium-
r-normal-*-140*

MouseCancel= Button used to cancel screen drawing of an object MouseCancel=Right

[Right, Left].
Warning: MouseCancel and MouseSelect cannot
be the same value! (exit and restart SynTool to
activate)

MouseMenu= Button used to cause object menus to pop up MouseMenu=Right

[Right, Left]. (exit and restart SynTool to
activate)

7 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

MiraSystem Variables
Variable Description Defaults
MouseSelect= Button used for selecting an object, moving MouseSelect=Left
panes, etc. Warning: MouseSelect and
MouseCancel cannot be the same value!
[Right, Left] (exit and restart SynTool to activate)

NoteApp= Command executable for the application that will SunOS and Solaris
be started when you select File ➛ Notes.
NoteApp=textedit
SGI
NoteApp=ieditor
IBM
NoteApp=xterm -e vi

PaneColorImpedance= [0..63] Color used for selected panes’ log curves PaneColorImpedance=9
PaneColorXXX= (close session and reopen to activate)
etc.

PaneTitleClr= [0..63] Color used for highlighting selected PaneTitleClr=9

panes’ title bars (close session and reopen to
activate)

PaneTitleTextClr= [0..63] Color used for writing text in Pane title PaneTitleTextClr=0
bars (close session and reopen to activate)

PaneXORColor= [0..63] Color used for rubber-banded zoom PaneXORColor=7

rectangle and the horizontal ruler feature (exit
and restart SynTool to activate)

ProportionalFont= Proportional Screen Font, used for axis labels, SunOS, SGI, and IBM
title bars, scale areas (exit and restart SynTool to ProportionalFont=adobe-
activate). There should be no spaces in the helvetica-b*-r*-*--14-140-*-
variable definition at right. *-*-*-*-*
Solaris
ProportionalFont=*helvetica-
medium-r-normal-*-140*

ReportDirectory= Default directory for reports such as checkshot, $HOME (home directory)
tops, TVD, etc.)

RulerUnits= [in,cm] Units default setting used for unspecified RulerUnits=in

plot measurements, for example, background
blanking pen width, print margins, etc. (close
session and reopen to activate)

ScreenForeClr= [0..63] foreground color for screen drawing (exit ScreenForeClr=1

and restart SynTool to activate)

ScreenBackClr= [0..63] background color for panes (exit and ScreenBackClr=0

restart SynTool to activate)

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 8

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

MiraSystem Variables
Variable Description Defaults
ScreenFontType= Screen display font ScreenFontType=Proportiona
l

ScreenHeight= View Preference (the actual height of the screen ScreenHeight=0.000000

image in inches)

ScreenWidth= View Preference (the actual width of the screen ScreenWidth=0.000000

image in inches)

ScrollBarHeight= Height of horizontal scrollbars, in pixels. (close ScrollBarHeight=15

session and reopen to activate)

ScrollBarWidth= Width of vertical scrollbars, in pixels. (close ScrollBarWidth=15

session and reopen to activate)

SegyDirectory= Directory where SynTool will write all .sgy files. $HOME (home directory)
Defaults to the user’s home directory if not
specified.

ShadowUpClr= [0..63] 3D effect color for toolbar buttons (exit ShadowUpClr=1

and restart SynTool to activate)

ShadowDownClr= [0..63] 3D effect color for toolbar buttons (exit ShadowDownClr=8

and restart SynTool to activate)

ShellApp= Application started when File ➛ OS Window is ShellApp=xterm

selected

TemplateDirectory= The directory where SynTool will look for $HOME (home directory)
session files and templates.

TimeScale= Last session’s time scale. [in,cm] TimeScale=in

VEColorStatic= [0..63] Color used by table editor for non-editable VEColorStatic=2

fields

VEColorEdit= [0..63] Color used by table editor for editable VEColorEdit=0

fields

9 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

SynTool Variables
Variable Description Defaults

ASCIISynFormat= ASCII format used for columns of numbers ASCIISynFormat=%12.5f

written by Save Synthetic ➛ to ASCII file menu
item (using C language printf() notation). The “.5”
in %12.5f specifies that columns values will
extend to 5 decimal places.

ASCIISynFormat2= ASCII format used for column text headings ASCIISynFormat2=%12.12s

written by Save Synthetic ➛ to ASCII file menu
item (using C language printf() notation). The first
and second value should be the same as the first
value in ASCIISynFormat.

ASCIITDFormat= ASCII format used for columns of numbers ASCIIFormat=%9.2f

written by the Time-Depth Report popup menu
item (using C language printf() notation). The “.2”
in %9.2f specifies that columns values will extend
to 2 decimal places.

ASCIITDFormat2= ASCII format used for column text headings ASCIIFormat2=%9.9s

written by the Time-Depth Report popup menu
item (using C language printf() notation). The first
and second value should be the same as the first
value in ASCIITDFormat.

AutoCorrSquareRoot= Takes the square root of the amplitudes in the AutoCorrSquareRoot=1

frequency domain during autocorrelation
extraction of wavelets. [1=yes, 0=no]

BackingStore= Should the X servers backing store facility be BackingStore=1

used. Setting to true may improve performance of
redraws but will use more memory (~1MB) [0=no,
1=yes] (exit and restart SynTool to activate)
DispSynthAsDeviated= When displaying a synthetic or log, whether by DispSynthAsDeviated=1
DispLogAsDeviated= default it will show as deviated (1) or vertical (o). DispLogAsDeviated=1

Ctx1= Last four session files saved in previous sessions. last saved listed first
Ctx2= These can be chosen from the bottom of the File
Ctx3= menu when SynTool is first started.
Ctx4=

DoHammingForMixed= Determines whether Hamming smoothing is done DoHammingForMixed=0

for extracted Wiener-Levinson wavelets
[0=no, 1=yes]

ForceDatumDialog= Determines if a datum dialog is displayed when a ForceDatumDialog=1

seismic project is selected that changes the time
datum. [0=no, 1=yes].

GridColor= Color used for grid lines [0..63] GridColor=1

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 10

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

SynTool Variables
Variable Description Defaults
GridExtend= Determines if object grid lines extend to pane GridExtend=1
borders or are clipped to within each object’s data
rectangle. Changed using the View ➛
Preferences dialog box. [0=no, 1=yes]

LabelClipping= Last session’s label clipping [0=no, 1=yes] This LabelClipping=0

and the next five “label” variables reflect your
settings from the Labels menu

LabelLineBack= Last session’s pick line background [0..63] LabelLineBack=1

LabelLineColor= Display color assigned to any picks that have not LabelLineColor=1
been assigned a color in OpenWorks

LabelLineWidth= Last session’s pick line width [1..n] LabelLineWidth=1

LabelPenStyle= Last session’s pick pen style [0..4] LabelPenStyle=2

LabelTextColor= Last session’s pick scale area text color [0..63] LabelTextColor=5

MajorGridStyle= Line style for major grid lines. Changed using the MajorGridStyle=0
View Preferences dialog’s Grid Styles option.
[0..4]

MEIWarning= When set to 1, you will always be warned about MEIWarning=1

the danger when using the Generalized Transform
process. When set to 0, no warnings will appear
[0,1]
MinFFTAmpPercentage= Percentage of the maximum amplitude in the MinFFTAmpPercent=1
frequency domain which is considered to be a
contributing frequency to Wiener-Levinson
extracted wavelets.
MinorGridStyle= Line style for minor grid lines. Changed using the MinorGridStyle=2
View ➛ Preferences dialog’s Grid Styles option.
[0..4]

MinPhasePercent= In the phase spectrum display of wavelets, phase MinPhasePercent=1

values that correspond to amplitudes below this
percentage will be set to zero.

NumSynTraces= Number of identical traces displayed when a new NumSynTraces=3

synthetic object is created. The number of traces
showing for the master synthetic when SynTool
exits is saved as this value.

QuickAccessMenu= [0=off, 1=on] Enables a Button 3 popup menu to QuickAccessMenu=1

appear anywhere within a pane (except on a
horizontal or vertical scale) listing some of the
most frequently used options. (exit and restart
SynTool to activate)

RcPolarity= Last session’s ‘Normal’ RC polarity setting [0, 1] RcPolarity=0

11 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

SynTool Variables
Variable Description Defaults
SampleInterval= Last session’s sample interval used for synthetics SampleInterval=2.000000
[in ms]

SaveASCIISyn= If set to 1, a menu item will appear on all synthetic SaveASCIISyn=0

trace popup menus that allows you to create an
ASCII file of synthetic depth, time, and
amplitudes.

ScaleColor= Color used to display the vertical scale and ScaleColor=1

horizontal scale text and line color [0..63] (close
session and reopen to activate)

ShowBorders= Determines whether or not pane borders are ShowBorders=1

visible [0=no, 1=yes]

StartupX= Horizontal pixel location of SynTool’s main StartupX=190

window when it is first started.

StartupY= Vertical pixel location of SynTool’s main window StartupY=147

when it is first started.

StartupHeight= Height of SynTool’s main window when it is first StartupHeight=600

started.
StartupWidth= Width of SynTool’s main window when it is first StartupWidth=768
started.

TDSource= The default source of the time-depth source. TDSource=1

[0=RC Sonic Directly, 1=RC Sonic Indirectly,
2=Constant Velocity, 3=Database Curve]

ThinBorders= Are pane borders thin lines? [0=no, 1=yes] ThinBorders=0

TVDValidationSlop= Percentage error allowed between the actual MD TVDValidationSlop=0.001

and the MD calculated from TVD, NS, and EW.
Normally a very small value here (~.1%) will help
eliminate validation problems caused by floating
point round-off or not having enough significant
digits in your TVD survey.

Printer Variable
Variable Description Default

PrintFontType= Print font type PrintFontType=proportional. Options are

proportional or fixed.

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 12

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

PrintSetup Variables
Variable Description Default

BottomMargin= Margin for prints BottomMargin=0.000000

ContinuousPrint= [0..1] Tells the application to ignore Margins between ContinuousPrint=0

adjacent pages of a continuous print.

DepthScale= Most recently used vertical scale for printing in depth. DepthScale=in

HorizontalOverlap= Print duplication between pages when creating a paneled HorizontalOverlap=0.500000

print

LastPrinter= Text description of last printer selected from the Printer set by user from Select output
Setup dialog. device dialog box (Path: File
➛ Printer Select)
LeftMargin= Margin for prints LeftMargin=0.000000

RecomputeAnnot= [0..1] Default values for Print dialog’s “Recompute RecomputeAnnot=0

Annotations” checkbox.

RightMargin= Margin for prints RightMargin=0.000000

ScaleHorizontal= [0..1] Print scaled horizontally ScaleHorizontal=1

ScaleVertical= [0..1] Print scaled vertically ScaleVertical=1

ShowDateTime= [0..1] Show date/time on printouts ShowDateTime=1

ShowDatumInfo= [0..1] Show Datum info on printouts ShowDatumInfo=1

ShowScale= [0..1] Show Vertical scale parameters on printouts ShowScale=1

ShowWellInfo= [0..1] Show Well Info on printouts ShowWellInfo=1

ShowWellName= [0..1] Show Well Name on printouts ShowWellName=1

TimeScale= Most recently used vertical scale for printing in time. TimeScale=5.000000

TitleAtTop= [0..1] Default values for Page Setup dialog’s title TitleAtTop=1
position checkbox.

TopMargin= Margin for prints TopMargin=0.000000

VerticalOverlap= Print duplication between pages for a paneled print VerticalOverlap=0.500000

CGM Variables are used only when you are printing directly to a file.
They are not used when UNIX autorouting of CGM files is enabled.
Edit only variables shown in italics.

CGM Variables
Variable Description Default

FontAliasing= The index of the selected CGM font alias. FontAliasing=0

13 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

CGM Variables
Variable Description Default
FontIndex= The index of the selected CGM font. FontIndex=0

FontLists= The index of the selected CGM font list. FontLists=0

FontSize= Height of CGM font in points (1 point = 1/72in). FontSize=12

This value should match the font size that your
CGM rasterizing software uses.

FontSpacing= Distance between characters FontSpacing=0.2

FontWidthHeightRatio= Ratio of the font width to the font height. This value FontWidthHeightRatio=.8
can be used to fine tune your printing results when
you are using third party fonts with your rasterizing
software.

MiraPaneling= [0, 1] Allows SynTool application to do panelling MiraPaneling=0

instead of software (for example, Zeh)

Plot Width= Plot width used for “resize panes” (in inches) PlotWidth=15.000000

PlotHeight= Plot height used for unscaled 1 page prints & resize PlotHeight=15.000000
panes (in inches)

Resolution= Resolution of output target device Set by user from Print/Plot

dialog box Printer Setup
button (Path: File ➛ Print)
for selected printer

OpenWorks Variables
SynTool works internally with a set of predefined curve types. These
types are defined as: Sonic, Density, Gardner, RCs, 1D Syn (master
synthetic), Impedance, and Unknown.

Determining Curve-Types
The OpenWorks database also has a concept of curve types, which are
defined by curve names.

How SynTool Uses Aliases

To make SynTool’s interaction with the OpenWorks database more
efficient, SynTool maps its predefined curve types to OpenWorks curve
names. SynTool uses this mapping information to:

• Suggest a “default” curve for loading into SynTool (for example,

to find a recent sonic curve for calculating RCs).

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 14

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• Suggest a default curve name when you ask SynTool to save a

curve it has derived. (For example, what name type would you like
assigned to a density log calculated from a sonic using the Gardner
equation?)

How SynTool Defines a Curve Alias

SynTool uses a curve-type alias list to relate OpenWorks curve names
to SynTool’s predefined curve types. The curve type alias lists are
stored in the .mirarc initialization file under the [OpenWorks3] section
heading. An example curve-type alias list is shown below:

[OpenWorks3]
Sonic=DT,DTC
Density=DEN,RHOB
(added) Gardner=GARDNER
(added) RC=RC
(added) 1D Syn=1D SYN
(added) Impedance=IMPEDANCE

On the left of each “=” is the predefined SynTool curve-type. On the

right is the list of OpenWorks curve names. SynTool assumes that all
curve names on the right are really the same as the SynTool predefined
name on the left.

After editing these variables, you must exit and restart SynTool to
activate them.

How SynTool Searches for a Default Curve

SynTool occasionally tries to find a curve of a particular type for you.
For example, in SynTool’s Startup dialog box, SynTool attempts to
propose a reasonable sonic and density log to use for calculating RCs.

SynTool goes through the following process when attempting to find a

“default” curve of a particular type:

• A list of all available curves for the well is generated. (This is the
list that you will see in the Select Curve dialog.)

• Curves whose OpenWorks’ curve names are not in the curve-type

alias list for this type are discarded from the list.

• SynTool selects the curve with the most recent time and date
stamp.

15 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

How SynTool Determines a name for Derived Curves

When you request SynTool to save a derived curve to the database, it
will propose a curve name that matches the predefined curve type being
saved. The name that SynTool proposes is the first name from the
curve-type alias list for this type.

For example, using the example of the curve alias list on page 15, if you
try to save a density log that has been calculated from the RC Sonic log,
SynTool will suggest a curve name of GARDNER. However, you do
not need to use what SynTool suggests. You may use a different curve
name.

GeneralTransform Variable

A Word About Variables in the .mirarc Initialization File

Variables shown in italics can be changed by editing the initialization file.

All other variables are under SynTool control and are placed in the
initialization file as needed by SynTool. Do not edit these variables.
Variables are also case sensitive!

Variable Description

EquationName=1,2,3... Specifies the equations and coefficients that

will be available in the Generalized
Transform Process dialog box.

Editing .mirarc
The .mirarc initialization file contains information that customizes your
SynTool application. You can view the contents of the .mirarc file
without running SynTool by typing more .mirarc in an xterm
window from your home directory ($HOME).

If edited variables do not take effect immediately, restart SynTool. See

Appendix B: Initialization File (.mirarc) for a list of variables in the .mirarc
initialization file, including those that require you to restart SynTool to
make them active.

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 16

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

A Word About Variables in .mirarc

Variables shown in italics can be changed by editing the .mirarc

initialization file. All other variables are under the SynTool control and are
placed in the .mirarc initialization file as needed by the SynTool. Do not
change these variables manually (by editing the initialization file). Variables
are case sensitive! To find out what variables you can change, see Appendix
B.

To edit the .mirarc initialization file.

1. Select File ➛ Edit .mirarc.

2. If this is the first time you have chosen Edit .mirarc, the following
dialog box appears.

3. Enter the program you want to use to edit the .mirarc file, followed
by the path to your .mirarc (your home directory by default). For
example

On an SGI you might enter:

EditMiraInit=/usr/sbin/ieditor
/home/bob/jerryd/.mirarc

On a Sun or Solaris, you might enter:

EditMiraInit=/usr/openwin3/bin/textedit
/home/bob/jerryd/.mirarc

On the IBM, use the vi text editor. For example,

EditMiraInit=xterm -e vi /home/bob/jerryd/.mirarc

4. Click on OK.

17 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The .mirarc file is displayed in the text editor/viewer you chose. To

change the editing program later, you must edit the EditMiraInit=
variable in the .mirarc initialization file.

Font information in the initialization file is read into SynTool when you
start the program or begin a session. If you edit font information, your
changes will not take effect until you restart SynTool. If you edit font
information while SynTool is running, you may see some parts of the
program using different fonts than others, or dialog boxes may appear
the wrong size. Exit SynTool, then restart to see the edited font effects.

.mirarc Troubleshooting

Certain variables do not appear in .mirarc initialization file

If certain user-definable variables do not appear in the .mirarc
initialization file, do the following:

1. Confirm that the variable that you want to define is editable.

(Variables in italics).

Variables not appearing in italics are placed in the .mirarc

initialization file by SynTool as needed and should not be edited.

2. Edit the .mirarc initialization file and type in the variable in the
appropriate section to include the desired setting.

Some variables require you to restart SynTool. Read the description

field next to each editable variable to find out if you need to close
or restart SynTool.

Variables in the .mirarc Initialization File

Variables shown in italics can be changed by editing the initialization

file. All other variables are under SynTool control and are placed in the
initialization file as needed by SynTool. Do not edit these variables.
Variables are also case sensitive!

Notes
SynTool provides examples for note taking programs in the .mirarc
initialization file. Simply remove the semi-colon (;) in front of the
NoteApp= variable corresponding to the system you are using. This

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 18

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

setting remains in effect for all future SynTool sessions. To change the
note taking program later, you must edit the NoteApp= entry in the
.mirarc file.

If the variable remains commented out, you will be prompted to supply

a note taking program as described in the procedure below.

1. Select File ➛ Notes from the main menu.

If this is the first time you selected this option, or the note taking
variable has not been defined, you are prompted to enter the
command line for a note taking program.

2. Enter the name of the executable. (If entering the name of the
executable does not work, you may need to supply the path as
well.)

The note taking program you chose appears.

OS Window
This option opens an xterm window when you select File ➛ OS
Window from the main menu.

If an xterm window does not appear, you are prompted to enter the
command line for the program you want to use.

19 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

1. Type the program name and path to the executable in the dialog
box above.

2. Click on OK.

If you want to change this option later, you must edit the ShellApp=
entry in the .mirarc initialization file. The program you choose for the
ShellApp= entry will appear the next time you select File ➛ OS
Window from the main menu.

Curve Units, measurement system

.

Tip: Correct Curve Storage Units

To get the correct curve storage units into the OpenWorks database,
OpenWorks provides two utilities called General Units Converter and
Special Units Converter. These can be launched by selecting Data ➛
Management ➛ Units from the OpenWorks main menu. You must have
manage access to use these utilities.

Always prompted for curve units

SynTool will prompt you for curve units under the following
circumstances:

• unknown, undefined, or unspecified units for curves stored in

OpenWorks

• unrecognized units as stored in OpenWorks in relation to display

units saved in the session file

The following sections provide an overview of the OpenWorks storage

of curve unit information and discuss the methods SynTool uses for
obtaining information it needs to properly display the selected curve(s).

Overview of OpenWorks Storage of Curve Unit Information

All data is stored in consistent units. There is a project preferred storage
unit for all measured quantities. These preferences are set when you
created the project. (Data loaders convert data on input from incoming
units to project units.) For data management purposes, the original data
units (as loaded) are stored in fields that are named the same as the

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 20

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

associated field with the suffix “_OUOM.” If there is any question as to

whether the correct conversions have been performed, you will be able
to compare the original units in the “_OUOM” field with the storage
units defined project wide.

Well Data Manager and the other OpenWorks utilities will display data
in units specified by the user. In order to limit the number of choices
you or an application must make, a concept of “systems of
measurement” has been introduced. A system of measurement consists
of a preferred unit for each type of measurement. A concept of a current
measurement system for an OpenWorks session allows you to set
display units once in a single place.

When a curve type is accessed, the table for storing curve information
is checked for valid units and this information is sent to SynTool. If the
new table is lacking units, or if an existing curve in the database is
lacking units, or the units are specified but different from the units for
that curve type, SynTool will not prompt you for display units, unless
you are inserting a sonic or density log.

See the OpenWorks Curve Dictionary documentation for information

on specifying curve unit types for curves on a project-by-project basis.
(OpenWorks Data Management, Vol. 1)

Unknown (log) Units at Startup

SynTool will prompt you at startup with the dialog box shown below
for any sonic or density curve in which the curve units are

• designated “unknown,” “undefined,” or left blank when loaded to

the OpenWorks database, or units assigned are different than
currently stored units for that curve type (such as g/cc instead of
g/cm3)

• not within a specified range SynTool checks when accessing the

curve

21 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The Log Units dialog box requires you to specify the display units for
the curve.

You are given

information about the
curve values and
SynTool’s
interpretation of what
the curve units may
be.

Do either of the following:

• If the information appears correct, click on OK.

• Click on the drop down list. Select from a list of allowed curve
types for the curve in question. Click on OK.

The list of allowed curve types comes from the OpenWorks

database.

Datums
SynTool uses the following datums:

• Time datum can change using the Datum Info option from the
Time/Depth Scale menu. Time datums are given as elevations with
positive numbers above sea level.

• Depth datum, or Log datum, cannot be changed in SynTool. The

depth datum is set to the current well’s log datum (as stored in the
OpenWorks database). These are always positive numbers above
sea level.

• Checkshot can have a different datum than a well’s depth datum

or time datum. Both time and depth values in the checkshot survey
must reference the checkshot datum. If the checkshot datum

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 22

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

differs from the time datum, then corrections to both time and
depth values are made using the replacement velocity.

• Seismic data can be displayed interactively from SeisWorks

through the Pointing Dispatcher (PD). Seismic data can also be
read into SynTool through SEG Y files. SynTool can create SEG Y
files from SeisWorks/2D or 3D projects. SynTool assumes that the
seismic data you are displaying is two-way time below SynTool’s
time datum. SynTool will read the seismic datum from the most
recent SeisWell project and automatically update SynTool’s time
datum.

SynTool Time Datum and SeisWorks

SynTool’s time datum should be set so that it is equal to the imported

seismic datum. If using the SeisWorks seismic functionality, or if using
SEG Y files created in SynTool 3.x, the time datum in SynTool will
automatically be changed to reflect the time datum in the SeisWorks or
SEG Y seismic data. SynTool does not allow you to datum-correct
(time shift) seismic data. SeisWorks seismic data can be bulk-shifted in
Poststack, BCM, or ProMax.

Time and depth display datums do not need to be the same elevation.
SynTool can display all data items (curves, tops, checkshots, seismic
traces, synthetics) in either depth or time. You change the current view
between linear in depth and linear in time using the Time/Depth icon or
menu option.

If a log curve from another well is added to the display by creating a

new pane or changing the input curve of a currently displayed pane,
SynTool automatically datum corrects the new curve to the current
well’s datum.

If you are trying to correlate seismic and synthetic data, SynTool’s time
datum should always be set to the same value as the seismic datum. Set
SynTool time datum in the Datum Info dialog box, Time text field.

23 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Selecting Checkshot Surveys and Time-Depth Tables

A time-depth table with too fine a sample interval will not give satisfactory
results. SynTool warns you if the survey you select has more points than
SynTool considers reasonable for a checkshot survey. You will be allowed to
reselect another time-depth table.

The Shift readout in the read-only section of the dialog box applies only to
time-depth tables and is ignored when checkshots are displayed or
highlighted in the selection list. If the shift displays anything other than 0, it
is not a checkshot survey.

If a time shift is found in the time-depth table you want to use as a checkshot
survey, SynTool will inform you as to how much of a shift was discovered.
SynTool will either allow you to apply the time shift to the checkshot time
values or ignore the shift when making checkshot corrections. You can also
make another selection. If you use the time-depth table as a checkshot
survey, recall the amount of shift SynTool discovered. If it is a valid time
shift, enter the amount in the Datum Info dialog box Absolute Shift text
field.

If the time shift is not entered into the Datum Info dialog box, the saved
synthetic will be off (by the amount of the time shift) when viewed in
SeisWorks.

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 24

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Time Datum is above the start of the time-to-

(Log Datum) depth curve. Changing the replacement velocity
shifts all curves in time.
Kelly Bushing (KB)

Replacement Velocity

Time Datum

Log start for

time-to-
depth curve

Time Datum is at or below the start of the time-to-

(Log Datum) depth curve. Changing the replacement velocity
does not shift any curves in time.
Kelly Bushing (KB)

Replacement Velocity

Time Datum
Log start for
time-to-depth Implied 0,0 TD
curve pair (if one does
not exist)

2-way Time = 2  LogDatum – DTLogStart

ReplacementVelocity 

Ft.
Time = = Sec
Ft./Sec

Replacement = Time Datum - TD Start Depth

Velocity
Start Time/2

Example Replacement Velocity Diagrams

25 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Guidelines for Using Time Shifts

Problems

Tying seismic data away from the well Seismic processing Checkshots & tying a well
exactly on a trace

2D seismic data 3D seismic data

Seismic processing problems There could be a lack of
could include: velocity control, or you could
A: Original B: Pseudo have bad checkshot data or no
well well at new • wavelet phase errors
checkshot data.
location x,y, location • bulk static errors
A
B • residual static errors
A B • datum errors
synthetic generated • migration errors
at original well
made to tie seismic • elevation errors
away from the well

Solutions
Changing the replacement velocity, applying time shifts, or correcting the seismic data or checkshots, may affect
the suitability of the generated TD table for use in other programs.

Correcting for seismic/synthetic tie Correcting for seismic Correcting for checkshot
problems: processing problems: problems:
• Create a pseudo well. In this situation, you • If possible, fix the seismic • Replacement Velocity. If
are creating a synthetic, and a TD function, data. Do not use time shifts there is no shallow velocity
at a physical location (x,y) away from the if a substantial time shift is control, do not use time
original well. OpenWorks stores the TD needed to obtain a good shifts to achieve a good
curve and synthetic for the pseudo well at seismic/synthetic seismic/synthetic
the proper x,y location. Other programs correlation.* correlation.* Instead, adjust
may use the TD function or synthetic. To fix the seismic data,
the replacement velocity.
Use the OpenWorks utilities to create the consult the contractor used • Bad checkshot data. Insert
pseudo well at the proper x,y locations of to process the data. checkshot diagnostic panes
the seismic data you will be tying. Copy and fix the bad checkshot
• TD tables with small time
the curves used to generate the synthetic. pairs. Do not use time shifts
shifts, applied in SynTool,
to achieve a good
• Use time shifts in SynTool. In this situation, are OK for use in other
seismic/synthetic
use the checkshot derived first layer applications if there is not a
correlation.*
velocity as the (P) Velocity value, and substantial shift required to
perform any remaining necessary shifts obtain a good
using the time shift fields in the Datum Info seismic/synthetic
dialog box. Set up other programs (that use correlation.*
the TD function) to ignore the time shift if
they are applying the TD function at the
well’s original x,y location.
* Use the seismic/synthetic correlation pane, for determining the best fit between your seismic and synthetic data.

December 2003 Introduction: Settings Prior to Running SynTool 26

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

SynTool Objects

The various log curves, synthetics, and seismic data types that Syntool
displays are called “objects.” Each object has one or more inputs and a
single output. It contains a set of processes that manipulate the input
data before it is displayed (or output to another object). An object has
processes specific to its purpose. For example, the synthetic object has
a Time Variant Filter. In each object, processing occurs in either the
time domain or depth domain. This domain is called the object's native
domain.

Examples:

• Native Depth Objects: Log curves

• Native Time Objects: Impedance, RC, synthetic seismograms, and

seismic sections

All time domain objects (except seismic sections) can be saved to the
project database, either as a curve saved to the database in depth, or as a
synthetic. Synthetics also can be saved to the database as a SEG Y file.

SynTool Object Types

When SynTool is first started and the SynTool object connections are
defined using the SynTool Startup dialog box, 6-8 panes are created and
displayed in the window. Seven panes are created if your time-to-depth
source is RC P-Wave Sonic Indirectly (the default selection at startup).
Similarly, seven and eight panes are displayed if you choose to input an
RC Shear curve.

The first pane contains the time-depth vertical scale. The next five or
seven panes contain predefined SynTool objects. Starting from the left
pane and moving right, you should see the following pane title and
scale area designations for any of the given depth/time source
selections:

27 Introduction: SynTool Objects December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Depth/Time Source Selection Pane Title Designation Scale Area

at Start-up Designation
RC P-Wave Sonic Indirectly 1-Time-Depth (separate pane) << curve name >>

RC P-Wave Sonic Directly A2-Sonic << curve name >>

Database Curve 1-Time-Depth (separate pane) << curve name >>

Constant Velocity 1-Time-Depth (separate pane) <<DT>>

A2-Sonic> < curve name >

A3-Shear < curve name>

A4-Density <A-curve name>

A5-Impedance) <A-IMPEDANCE>

A6-RC (reflection coefficients) <A-RC>

A7-Syn> (default synthetic) <A-1D SYN>

The brackets < > in the Scale Area Designation indicate default
designated objects. In addition to the above objects, you can add the
following:

• seismic sections
• synthetics
• new combinations of RC, Impedances and Synthetics
• new families
• database synthetics
• auxiliary curves
• checkshot diagnostics
• picks

Time-to-Depth Source Selection at Start-Up

The velocities of the time-to-depth source curve, after all processes and
edits are applied, are used to convert all curves, formation labels (tops),
and seismic data between time and depth. You can define only one
time-to-depth curve in a SynTool session. The following are the four
sources for the time-to-depth curve.

• RC P-Wave Sonic Indirectly. Default selection. Connects a new

curve object to the output of the RC sonic. If you choose this
option, the checkshot application affects the time-depth relation
but will not directly influence the amplitude of the reflection
coefficients. This is the preferred method.

December 2003 Introduction: SynTool Objects 28

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• RC P-Wave Sonic Directly. Use output velocities of the RC sonic.

When you choose this option, the time-to-depth curve is not
displayed in a separate pane because it is the same curve you
selected for the RC P-Wave Sonic in the Startup dialog box.

• Database Curve. Select another curve from the database as the

time-to-depth source. With this option, you may pick another sonic
or a shear sonic to view data in S-wave travel time.

• Constant Velocity. Specify a constant velocity. The same

processes* that can be applied using the Database Curve option
can be applied here.

RC Sonic Directly vs RC Sonic Indirectly

SynTool applies the checkshot process differently based on your
selection of RC Sonic Directly and RC Sonic Indirectly. T

• RC Sonic Directly applies checkshots to the RC Sonic calculating

both the RCs and time-to-depth function from the checkshot
corrected sonic.

• RC Sonic Indirectly calculates RCs from the original RC Sonic of

which a “copy” is made, and applies checkshots from the copy.
This checkshot-corrected sonic determines and creates the time-to-
depth function as shown below.

RC Sonic DATABASE RC Sonic DATABASE

DIRECTLY INDIRECTLY

Depth RC Sonic “copy” of RC RC Sonic

to (checkshots RC Density Sonic (checkshots (no checkshots RC Density
Time applied) applied) applied)
Function

RCs Depth RCs

to
Time
synthetic Function synthetic

If you chose RC Sonic Directly as a time-to-depth source, the checkshot

corrections have a direct affect on the RCs. This means that only the
polynomial checkshot correction method will produce “smooth” RCs.
However, in smoothly distributing its adjustments, the polynomial will
not give exact corrections. You may want to use the Graphical

29 Introduction: SynTool Objects December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Checkshot Editor to place kneepoints in the checkshot survey where the

resulting kicks on the RC series can be properly interpreted.

Selecting RC Sonic Indirectly is generally preferable because it avoids

polynomial checkshot correction. With this method, kicks are always
avoided at checkshot boundaries. All checkshot methods will produce
“smooth” RCs. However, be aware that this method does depart from
the theoretical model, in which reflectivity is a function of velocity.

In the example on the next page, amplitude changes are not present in
the synthetic on the right because checkshots were applied from a copy
of the RC Sonic (RC Sonic Indirectly used for time-to-depth source)
and not from the actual RC Sonic. No significant amplitude spikes are
introduced into the RCs or synthetic, so more of the original geology
around the well is retained. In the synthetic on the left (saved as a SEG
Y file), RC Sonic Directly was chosen as the time-to-depth source and
checkshots applied. Amplitude changes are introduced in the RC Sonic
that affected the RCs and resulting synthetic. This is also evident in the
pane on the right displaying the RC Sonic Indirectly generated

December 2003 Introduction: SynTool Objects 30

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

synthetic over the RC Sonic Directly generated synthetic.

RC Sonic RC Sonic
Directly; Indirectly;
generated generated
synthetic synthetic
RC Sonic RC Sonic
Directly Indirectly
Checkshots (or checkshot methods) that Checkshot corrections apply to the time-to-depth
cause discontinuities in the RC Sonic conversion but do not introduce amplitude changes in
will also cause a change in RC the calculated RC at checkshot depths; more well
amplitudes at checkshot depths. geology is retained.

RC P-Wave Sonic (A2-Sonic)

The P-Wave velocity curve used to calculate the reflection coefficients
is called the RC P-Wave Sonic. All processing and editing is performed
on the RC P-Wave Sonic in its native depth domain. Any other log may

31 Introduction: SynTool Objects December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

be input as the RC P-Wave Sonic (for example, shear interval transit

times (ITT) or resistivity).

The Numerical Value of the RC P-Wave Sonic

It is very important that the numerical values of the RC P-Wave Sonic

appear in a range suitable for ITT or velocity if the output of the RC P-Wave
Sonic is also used as the time-to-depth source (RC P-Wave Sonic Directly at
start-up). This is because the time-to-depth curve is used to calculate the
time-depth relationship.

The RC P-Wave Sonic can be read from the database with an optional
transform applied, calculated from the RC Density curve, or specified
as a constant velocity.

Your well does not have a sonic log?

If a well does not have a sonic or a resistivity curve to use with the Faust
equation, but has a conductivity curve instead, you can calculate a pseudo-
sonic using the Conductivity Faust equation. (Transform types may be
defined or modified using the Generalized Transform dialog box. See “User
Defined Transform Process” on page 201 for more information.)

RC Shear Sonic (A3-Shear)

The shear wave velocity curve used to calculate the reflection
coefficients is called the RC Shear Sonic. Inputting an RC Shear Sonic
is optional; if it is input, SynTool will display elastic impedances
instead of acoustic impedances.

All processing and editing is performed on the RC Shear Sonic in its

native depth domain. Any other log may be input as the RC Shear
Sonic (for example, shear interval transit times (ITT) or resistivity).

The RC Shear Sonic can be read from the database with an optional
transform applied or calculated from the RC P-Wave Sonic curve using
a transform.

RC Density (A4-Density)
The RC Density may be used for the calculation of reflection
coefficients. All processing and editing is performed on the RC Density
in its native depth domain. SynTool provides the following sources for
the RC density:

December 2003 Introduction: SynTool Objects 32

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• Read from the Database

• Calculated from the RC P-Wave Sonic (for example, Gardner
Density)
• Constant Density

You can create a Gardner Density curve generated from the RC P-Wave
Sonic. The SynTool Startup dialog box allows you to select a transform
equation that converts the RC P-Wave Sonic into density. The Gardner
Density (shown below) is the default selection. If you select any other
equation, the specific equation will appear in the Edit Process list for
that object.

Impedance (A5-Impedance)
Acoustic or elastic impedance depending on whether the shear wave
curve used. Inputting the RC Shear Sonic results in elastic impedance.
The Impedance receives time domain data from the RC P-Wave Sonic,
RC Shear Sonic (if input) and RC Density. All processing is performed
on the Impedance in the time domain. You cannot edit Impedances.

RCs (A6-RC)
The RC object receives time domain data from the Impedance object.
All processing is performed on the RCs in the time domain. One RC is
generated for the default display but you can add any number of RCs to
the SynTool display. You cannot edit RCs.

Synthetic (A7-Syn)
One synthetic is generated for the default display. You can add any
number of synthetics to the SynTool display.

Each synthetic receives time domain data from the RCs. All processing
is performed on the default synthetic in its native time domain. You
cannot edit the synthetic. The synthetic can be viewed as any
combination of synthetic traces, wavelets, and contribution plots.

If the synthetic is generated from a curve(s) selected from another well

in the database, it will be saved to the well selected at startup—not to
the well from which that curve was selected.

33 Introduction: SynTool Objects December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Database Synthetics
Database synthetics are any kind of numerical data that has been loaded
into the project database as a synthetic, or it can be a synthetic
generated and saved in SynTool. Database synthetics are read directly
from the database in their native time domain.

Database synthetics can also be used for synthetic correlation with

seismic data. You can also make a three-way correlation between
seismic, database synthetic, and the active model synthetic.

Synthetic Correlation
You can create a visual Synthetic Correlation display which shows the
correlation between any seismic data object and any synthetic curve
overlaid on the seismic. Multiple synthetic correlations can be
displayed simultaneously, using an intuitive workflow to select inputs
for the synthetic correlations. This feature works equally well with
synthetics and database synthetics.

Auxiliary Curves
Auxiliary curves are any kind of numerical data that has been loaded
into the project database as a curve or synthetic. Auxiliary curves are
read directly from the database in their native depth domain. Auxiliary
curves do not provide input to any other objects.

Seismic Sections
Seismic sections can be transferred from a SeisWorks Seismic View
through the Pointing Dispatcher (PD) or they may be read directly from
SEG Y data files in the time domain. Seismic sections may also be
viewed with a linear depth scale. As with all SynTool objects, the
conversion from time to depth uses velocities from the time-to-depth
source selected at start-up. No editable processes are available.

Checkshot Diagnostics
Checkshot diagnostics help you determine bad checkshot pairs or
incorrect checkshot locations. Use checkshot diagnostics to quality
control the checkshot application. If the incorrect checkshot or bad
checkshot is left in, an incorrect velocity may be applied and may cause
inaccurate results when trying to tie the synthetic with the seismic data.

December 2003 Introduction: SynTool Objects 34

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Checkshot diagnostic displays can be interactively edited use mouse

buttons and special editing tools to adjust knee picks and apply the
adjustments to the data.

Picks
SynTool picks are text descriptions that describe an event at a particular
log depth. Picks typically annotate geologic formation changes.

SynTool can only work with picks that are stored in the OpenWorks
database in depth. Picks stored in time cannot be displayed. There are
no editable processes that can be applied to picks. Edits (to curves) that
may affect picks cannot be saved to the database.

35 Introduction: SynTool Objects December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Curve Family

It is also possible to have more than one curve family active within a
session. Each family can have its own complete set of input curves, or
can share one or more of the input curves with another family. Each
curve family consists of a set of input curves - P-Wave Sonic, Shear
Wave Sonic (if input), Density, and all the component objects—
impedances, RC series, and synthetics—derived from the input curves.
The following diagram shows a session with two curve families.

DISPLAY
Time-Depth Time to Depth
Curve Depth to Time
(time-to-depth Converter
source)
DISPLAY

P-WAVE
SONIC
RCs DEFAULT
DISPLAY (autogenerated) SYNTHETIC

DISPLAY

DISPLAY
IMPEDANCE (autogenerated)
DENSITY (autogenerated)
DISPLAY

ADDED
SYNTHETIC

DISPLAY
SHEAR (user-generated)
Project Database

SONIC
DISPLAY

(if input) ADDED

SYNTHETIC

DISPLAY
(user-generated)
DISPLAY

P-WAVE
SONIC
RCs DEFAULT
SYNTHETIC
DISPLAY

(autogenerated)
DISPLAY

DISPLAY
IMPEDANCE (autogenerated)
DENSITY (autogenerated)
DISPLAY

ADDED
SYNTHETIC
DISPLAY

SHEAR (user-generated)
SONIC
DISPLAY

(if input) ADDED

SYNTHETIC
DISPLAY

(user-generated)
Object Shared with all families

Objects in Family A

Objects in Family B

December 2003 Introduction: Curve Family 36

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

In this case, the Time-Depth object is derived from the P-Wave Sonic in
the first family, family A. This Time-Depth Object is shared by any
families which might be added in the session.

It is possible to have more than one impedance object for a given set of
input curves. Likewise, for each impedance object, it is possible to have
more than one RC series object, and for each RC series object, it is
possible to have more than one synthetic object. All the objects derived
from a particular object are known as its “descendants,” while all the
objects from which a particular object is derived, up to and including
the set of input curves, are known as its “ancestors.” Edits to any of the
input curves, or any objects’ process parameters, will be reflected on all
the descendent objects in that family’s pipeline.

When you create a new pane or overlay for impedance, RC series, or

synthetic, you will now be asked to specify the family name or “parent”
object for the object being created. Alternatively, you can use the right
mouse-click popup on any pane in a family, and create a new
descendent or set of descendent panes, each with their own set of
editable processes.

Several features have been included to help manage the number of

panes that will be generated in a session with multiple curve families.
Families are automatically named “A”, “B”, “C”, and so on, as they are
created up to “Z.” For a given object, all of that object’s ancestors
and/or descendents can be highlighted. Any object, along with all of its
descendents, can be deleted, as can an entire family.

Seismic panes, auxiliary log panes, the time/depth curve pane,

checkshot diagnostic panes, and database synthetic panes are not
associated with any curve family.

37 Introduction: Curve Family December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts

This section discusses some basic concepts of synthetic generation and

model wavelets. It also provides a basic wavelet extraction overview.

Creating a Synthetic
In order to create synthetic traces, SynTool first uses the velocities
and/or densities in the well logs to calculate acoustic impedance and
reflectivity in the earth at the well. It then generates synthetic traces that
simulate the behavior of a wavelet traveling through the earth. Each of
these steps is explained in more detail below.

The Impedance Log

An acoustic impedance log (AI) is derived directly from log densities
(ρ) and velocities ( V p ) using the following formula:

AI = ρ × V p

When RC Shear Sonic is input ( V s ), the elastic impedance is derived

directly from log densities and velocities according to the following
formula:
2 2 2
( 1 + ( tan θ ) ) ( ( – 8K ) ( sin θ ) ) ( 1 – 4K ( sin θ ) )
EI ( θ ) = V p Vs ρ

where
2
V
K = ------2s- , constant over the entire log
Vp
θ is the angle of incidence

Initially, θ is 0 and the default V p ⁄ V s ratio is 2 but you can change

these parameters in the Elastic Acoustic process to simulate varying
angles of incidence and lithology. The function for EI ( θ ) is valid over
a range of incidence angles from 0 to about 30 degrees. When the angle
of incidence is zero, the function for EI ( θ ) collapses to the expression
for acoustic impedance.

December 2003 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts 38

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

The Reflectivity Series

For acoustic impedance, SynTool uses the following formula to
calculate a series of reflection coefficients that predict how seismic
impulses would reflect in the vicinity of the well. The sonic or density,
or both, can be used to calculate the RC series.

AI 2 – AI 1 V2 – V1 ρ2 – ρ1
RCs = ------------------------
- RCs = -------------------
- RCs = -----------------
AI 2 + AI 1 V2 + V1 ρ2 + ρ1
Sonic and Density Sonic Density

For elastic impedance, the RC series is calculated as follows:

EI2 – EI1
RCs = ------------------------
-
EI2 + EI1

The reflection coefficients are used to build the following RC traces:

• Primaries Only
• Attenuated Primaries and Multiples

See page 191 for information on the RC process in SynTool.

The 1D Synthetic Trace

Once the reflectivity at the well is calculated, SynTool can easily
simulate the effect of a seismic wavelet moving through the earth and
encountering the various reflection coefficients. To do this, SynTool
convolves the wavelet with the reflection coefficient series to produce a
one-dimensional (1D) synthetic traces.

The character and usefulness of synthetic traces can vary widely,

depending on the accuracy of the well log and the type of wavelet used.
In SynTool, you can derive wavelets in three ways:

• Wavelets can be selected from the database, or from a set of

wavelets saved for a particular well.

• A set of filters can be used to generate model wavelets

(Butterworth, Ricker, etc.).

• The wavelet extraction option lets you statistically compare an RC

trace to a portion of the seismic data and select the “best match”
wavelet.

39 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The ultimate goal is to generate synthetic traces that best reflect the
seismic behavior at the well in the zone of interest. By displaying such
traces alongside the seismic data, with an understanding of the wavelet
phase and timing, you should be able to identify primary reflections in
the seismic by comparing them to the synthetic, the well log features,
and the lithology.

Model Wavelets
SynTool allows you generate wavelets analytically or statistically. The
analytic method generates model wavelets based on standard playout
filters used in seismic processing.

Ideally, a model wavelet should be constructed from all the known

seismic acquisition and processing parameters (source signature,
ghosting, reverberation, filtering, etc.). However, SynTool only applies
filtering.

Filters Provided
The following filters are provided for generating model wavelets in
SynTool (default filter parameters are shown):

8-14-40-60:0 35 Hz:0 10-60 10:0 10-20-40-60:0

Trapezoid (bandpass) Ricker Klauder Butterworth

(page 179) (page 181) (page 182) (page 183)

Supported SynTool Filters and Resulting Wavelets

All of these filters produce generally symmetrical zero-phase wavelets

They are available through the Time Variant filter process (page 175).

December 2003 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts 40

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Benefits of Using Model Wavelets

Model wavelets are relatively quicker and easier to generate than
extracted wavelets. In fact, sometimes, a model wavelet may be the
only way you can generate a usable synthetic because in some cases it
may be impossible to produce a reliable extracted wavelet.

As with extracted wavelets, the ultimate purpose of using model

wavelets is to develop a synthetic that can be matched reliably with
actual seismic data. In some cases, a model wavelet may not produce
the best synthetic, but it can give you a good idea of the phase and other
characteristics of the data. For example, you might use a Ricker wavelet
to generate a synthetic, then compare the synthetic “fit” to the seismic
in the Synthetic correlation pane displayed next to the seismic section
(with the synthetic displayed as an overlay on the seismic section).

If the major peaks and troughs are misaligned, there could be phasing
problems. To investigate further, you could alter the wavelet by
applying a phase rotation, a 20-degree phase shift, or reverse polarity to
see how this affects the match.

Ultimately, your analysis may identify processing problems and the

potential need for reprocessing. Your analysis could also indicate
inaccuracies in the log calibration process and the potential need for
recalibration. On the other hand, if the resulting synthetic closely
matches the seismic, it could indicate that the seismic has been suitably
processed and the log was correctly calibrated.

Using a Model Wavelet

Some guidelines for working with model wavelets are listed below.

• To find out which playout filter was used in the final stages of
processing, look at the side label on the seismic section. Generally,
this indicates the type of filter and the parameters used (frequency
bandwidth, slope cuts, etc.).

• The type of filter that you use may also depend on the shape of the
processed seismic trace and the frequency content of the data.
Typically, you will want to use a wavelet that best matches the
bandwidth of the seismic data.

• Some wavelets can be used for special purposes. For example,

Butterworth filters can be made to slope more gently and allow
you to define a frequency cutoff that matches the cutoffs in the
processed data.

41 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• The model wavelet may be an intermediate analytical step before

final wavelet extraction or it may be the only way available to
generate a wavelet. Sometimes wavelet extraction may not work
best—for example, if the well is deviated. If not, a model wavelet
may provide a better match. However, a wellbore extraction
feature is now available for doing wavelet extraction on deviated
wells.

Wavelet Extraction
Wavelet extraction is an option you can use to increase the confidence
level of your interpretation. This feature allows you to statistically
compare seismic to well log data in order to identify a “best-fit”
wavelet for generating synthetic traces. In this case, you are extracting
a wavelet directly from the processed seismic data at a location where
there should be a statistically optimum match between the synthetic
and the seismic.

Wavelet extraction provides the seismic interpreter with a number of

important benefits. In particular, it

• helps identify where well log and seismic coincide in cases such as
the following:

A deviated well is penetrating the zone of interest at an unknown

location in the seismic data.

The seismic has lateral imaging problems due to complex geology

or salt provinces.

• provides an indication of stratigraphic continuity as you move

away from the well. This continuity is visible directly on the
screen by the color-coded diagrams provided during the wavelet
extraction process.

• helps identify static shifts or datum problems between the log and
seismic data.

• provides wavelets that can be exported from the system and used
as a processing operator for zero-phasing seismic data.

(Analogously, wavelet extraction can be used to design a filter for

matching vintages of seismic data. Instead of matching reflectivity
at the well to seismic, you can match two groups of seismic data
taken from different sources.)

December 2003 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts 42

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• has a positive impact on business decisions by increasing the

confidence level in seismic interpretations and by reducing the risk
inherent in erroneous interpretations.

Wellbore Extraction
SynTool’s wellbore seismic amplitude extraction feature lets you
extract seismic amplitudes along paths that are parallel to deviated
wellbores. The result of this extraction is saved as a new .3dv file (for
3D data) or .2v2 file (for 2D data) that is added to the SeisWorks
project. This file can then be used to do accurate wavelet extractions
based on the actual seismic samples through which the wellbore passes.
Wellbore extraction provides several benefits:

• Wavelet extraction using SynTool’s other methods can now be

done along the deviated wellbore.

• The extracted seismic file allows you to visualize the actual traces
from which a wavelet has been extracted, as well as the trace
which should correlate most closely to a synthetic seismogram.
Overlaying a synthetic in vertical display mode provides this
visual match.

• A meaningful synthetic correlation can be done between a

synthetic and traces from the wellbore extracted seismic file.

This feature is conceptually similar to a TVD (True Vertical Depth)

correction, in that samples along the wellbore are shifted horizontally
to a vertical path extending upward from the bottomhole location. As
such, it is not appropriate for horizontal, near-horizontal, or recumbent
wells.

Deviated Displays
By default, all objects are displayed as deviated if deviated information
exists in the database for that object. Deviated display styles are
available only for log curves and synthetics that are displayed on top of
a seismic section.

By default, SynTool displays all objects as deviated if deviated

information exists in the database for that object. The default can be
changed by setting the following resources in the .mirarc file:

• DispSynthAsDeviated=0

43 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• DispLogAsDeviated=0

About Deviated Display Styles

Deviated display styles are available only for log curves and synthetic
traces that are displayed on top of a seismic section—deviated
information must exist in the database for the selected curve or
synthetic. To use a deviated display style, TVD corrections must be
currently applied and you must have NS and EW deviation distances
stored in the current project database for the well.

Deviated displays are produced by projecting the 3D well bore into a

flat 2D plane. The plane that you project into is usually the plane
described by a seismic section.

When displaying on a SEG-Y pane, in addition to the deviation

information that can be stored in a project database, SynTool requires
two additional items of information:

• distance between traces on the seismic section

• orientation of the seismic line with respect to the well

TVD correction must be applied to view logs in deviated mode.

SynTool will issue an error message if you try to view a curve in

deviated mode and TVD correction has not been applied. To apply
TVD correction, see “TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process”
on page 197.

For objects overlain on seismic data, you have the option of displaying
deviated display styles from the object’s View Options dialog box. In
the following sections, the deviated display style option is accessed
from a log curve overlay and synthetic, or database synthetic overlay.

When displaying on a SeisWorks seismic pane, the projection is done

automatically. When displaying on a SEG-Y pane, SynTool requires
the orientation of the seismic line with respect to the well to do the
projection. If the local geologic strike is perpendicular to the seismic
line, and the geology is not too complicated, the line’s azimuth (from
low to high CDP number) should be provided as a compass direction.

If there are significant structural complexities between the well and

seismic line, you may need to provide an azimuth that is not really the
true compass direction to get a geologically accurate tie between the
seismic data and the well. SynTool expects the azimuth angle to be

December 2003 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts 44

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

between 0o and 360o measured from north. This angle is determined as

follows:

Imagine you are standing on the seismic line. Aim your compass at the
next higher CDP number. The proper azimuth is the current compass
reading, measured clockwise from North. For example, if you are
pointing Southwest, the correct azimuth is 225o as shown in the
illustration below.

large CDP large CDP

numbers numbers

45o
seismic line seismic line
W E W E

180o+45o = 225o

small CDP small CDP

numbers numbers
S Map View S Map View

If you have created a SEG Y file in SynTool from SeisWorks/2D or 3D

seismic data, you can view the .lst file to find out the distance between
traces and the northing angle for coding an azimuth.

TVD correction must be applied to view logs in deviated mode.

SynTool will issue an error message if you try to view a curve in

deviated mode and TVD correction has not been applied. To apply
TVD correction, see “TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process”
on page 197.

45 Introduction: Synthetic and Wavelet Concepts December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Getting Started

This chapter describes how to start SynTool and create the default
display.

The sections in this chapter cover:

• Starting SynTool

• Selecting a Well List and Well

• Selecting Active and Reference Checkshots

• Selecting Seismic Project for Time Datum Reference

• Specifying Startup Parameters

December 2003 - 46

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Starting SynTool

To start SynTool

1. Select Applications ➛ SynTool from the OpenWorks Command

Menu.

The SynTool window is blank when it first appears.

47 Getting Started: Starting SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Selecting a Well List and Well

Once SynTool is started, select a well list and well to use in the session.

1. Select File ➛ New from the main menu.

2. Select a measurement system and click OK.

If a measurement system for the OpenWorks project has not been

selected you are prompted to specify a measurement system. If you
want to change the measurement system for that project, you can do
this from OpenWorks Command Menu ➛ Project ➛ Project
Status ➛ Options. If the measurement system is changed while
SynTool is running, the change is immediately reflected. Choices
for measurement systems are:

• US Oil Field is predominately U.S. English units with metric

units for some log curve and engineering data. The units are
designed to correspond to those used by U.S. oil companies.

The U.S. Oil Field measurement system corresponds to the

English measurement system in previous versions of
OpenWorks.

• SPE Preferred Metric represents the common metric units

used in the oil field. It is based on the publication “The SI
Metric System of Units and SPE Metric Standard” from the
Society of Petroleum Engineers.

SPE Preferred Metric corresponds to the Metric measurement

system in previous versions of OpenWorks.

• US Oil Field (metric depth) is the same as U.S. Oil Field for
all units except depths, which are in meters. This measurement
system is intended for U.S. oil companies operating
internationally.

• Canadian Metric mirrors SPE Preferred Metric.

• Customized Measurement System is a customized

measurement system using the OpenWorks Measurement
System Manager,.

3. Select a project and click OK.

December 2003 Getting Started: Selecting a Well List and Well 48

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

4. Select an interpreter and click OK to open the Select Well List

dialog box

5. Select a well list and click OK.

6. Select a well by double-clicking on the desired well.

TIP: Selecting Wells From SeisWorks or OpenWorks

If SeisWorks is running, you can transfer a well from a Map View or

Seismic View (SeisWorks 2D or 3D) to SynTool. If you want to use a
particular well in SeisWorks, press Shift-MB2 when the cursor is
positioned over a well symbol in Map View or a well track in Seismic
View. Similarly, you can select a well from an OpenWorks application
by pressing Shift-MB2. The well will appear highlighted in the Pick a
Well dialog box above. This can be useful for projects with a large
number of wells; it will save time when looking for a particular well.
The well does not have to be in the selected well list for you to use it.

View Different Well Data Without Exiting SynTool.

It is not necessary to exit SynTool in order to view data from another well
within the project. To view different well data

Select File ➛ Close from the main menu. You are prompted to save a
session file (along with any unsaved edits to log curves, TVD corrections
and/or checkshots).

Once you have saved your current SynTool session, select File ➛ New,
Open Session, Open Template, or pick one of four quick-start session files
listed at the bottom of the File menu.

49 Getting Started: Selecting a Well List and Well December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Selecting Active and Reference Checkshots

After you select a well, the Syntool Pick the Active and Reference
Checkshots dialog box appears. Select an Active Checkshot Survey
and a Reference Checkshot Survey to use during the work session. The
Active Survey is used for corrections to the seismic data. The
Reference Survey is used in editing mode to display a baseline set of
reference values to compare against the edited survey.

1. Select the checkshot survey using one of the following methods:

• Click on the checkshot survey name.

• Toggle on Show T-D Tables and select a time-depth table to

use as a checkshot survey.

If the time-depth table you want to use for checkshots contains

a time shift, you are inform as to how much of a shift was
discovered. You can either apply the shift, ignore the shift, or
make another selection.

• Click Change Well and select another well to use its checkshot
survey or time-depth table.

Double-click new survey for an empty survey to add

checkshot points at specified locations.

2. Click OK.

December 2003 Getting Started: Selecting Active and Reference Checkshots 50

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Selecting Seismic Project for Time Datum Reference

1. Select the SeisWorks project and enter the Time Datum.

If the SynTool session is not tied to any particular SeisWorks

project, you can also enter the time datum directly.

2. Click OK.

51 Getting Started: Selecting Seismic Project for Time Datum Reference December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Specifying Startup Parameters

Once you select a Seismic Project for Time Datum Reference, the
SynTool Startup dialog box appears.

In this dialog box, you specify the parameters SynTool uses to

automatically generate the reflection coefficient series (RCs),
impedance, and synthetic. This dialog box also provides parameters
that will affect how you work with other data.

Startup Parameters
• Time-Depth Source—cannot be changed within a session

• RC P-Wave Sonic—required, but does not need to be a sonic

log; can be changed within a session

• RC Shear Sonic—optional, can also be generated from

P-Wave Sonic

• RC Density—required but does not need to be a density log;

can be changed within a session

• Depth Range—cannot be changed within a session

• Depth Sample Interval—cannot be changed within a session

• Processing—can be turned on/off within a session

Select Time-Depth Source

Select the time-depth source from the following options. RC P-Wave
Sonic Indirectly is the default. However, a new selection becomes the
default the next time a new session is started or File ➛ New is selected.

You can only apply checkshots to these time-to-depth sources:

• RC P-Wave Sonic Indirectly is the default selection. Checkshot

corrections apply to the time-to-depth conversion but do not
introduce amplitude changes in the calculated RC at checkshot
depths. This is the preferred method for calculating the time-depth
relationship from a sonic curve. This option inserts a pane.

December 2003 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters 52

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• RC P-Wave Sonic Directly uses velocities as the source for time-

depth information. Checkshots causing discontinuities in the RC
P-Wave Sonic such as, ITT or Vel methods will change in RC
amplitudes at the checkshot depths. This option does not insert a
pane. Time-to-depth source and the RC P-Wave Sonic select are
shown in the same pane as one object.

• Database Curve reads any curve from the database to provide the
time-depth relationship. The only restriction is that the curve must
measure velocity or interval transit time that is, an SP curve will
not work. A Curve Select dialog box appears.

• Constant Velocity creates an imitation sonic curve at a specified

velocity. A Velocity dialog box appears. Enter a velocity and unit
of measurement. This method is useful if you only want to use
SynTool to display or edit auxiliary curves.

Importing TD Tables from OpenWorks to use as Checkshots

SynTool does not use TD tables for time-to-depth conversion. Time-to-

depth calculations use the velocities contained in the time-to-depth curve
(Time-Depth Source option) selected in the Startup dialog box. The only
way to make SynTool honor a particular TD table is to import it and apply it
as checkshots to the curve selected as the time-to-depth curve (Time-Depth
Source option in the Startup dialog box).

Select RC P-Wave Sonic source

Select a RC P-Wave Sonic sources for calculating the reflection
coefficients from the following choices:

• Curve specifies which RC P-Wave Sonic curve to load. You do not

need to pick a sonic log. However, the log selection must have
reasonable values for velocity or interval transit time. Click
Change for the Select P-Wave Sonic RC Log dialog box.

A curve from another well is saved to the well selected at startup. It

is copied and made available to the well selected at startup for the
current session and every time that session is accessed.

You apply a mathematical transform to the RC P-Wave Sonic by

clicking on Apply Transform. For example, you can select a
resistivity curve as the RC P-Wave Sonic. Using this option, you
can apply the Faust transform to convert from ohm-m to velocity.

53 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Constant uses a constant velocity curve for calculating reflection

coefficients. Enter the desired velocity and include the appropriate
unit of measurement (must be either ft/s, m/s, µs/ft, or µs/m).

• From RC Density uses the output of the RC Density curve. Select

the proper transform equation such as, Inverse Gardner to convert
the RC Density curve from g/cc to velocity.

Sonic and Density Logs with Zero and Negative Values

Zero and negative values in the RC sonic log are treated similarly to
NULL values—they are replaced with values interpolated from
neighboring valid points. Bad values in sonic or density logs are
removed; bad values in other panes displaying sonic or density logs are
not removed.

Select RC Shear Sonic source

Select the RC Shear Sonic source for calculating reflection coefficients
from the following choices:

• None is the default. No RC Shear Sonic source is used. As a

consequence, the impedance pane will display acoustic impedance
instead of elastic impedance and no offset modeling will be
available.

• Curve specifies which RC Shear Sonic to load. Click Change for

the Select Shear Sonic RC Log dialog box.

A curve from another well is saved to the well selected at startup. It

is copied and made available to the well selected at startup for the
current session and every time that session is accessed.

Select this option to use the output of the RC P-Wave Sonic curve
as the RC Shear Sonic. You apply a mathematical transform to the
RC Shear Wave Sonic by clicking on Apply Transform. Use the
proper transform equation such as, Castagna Vp to Vs Equation.

Using Resistivity Log to Generate Reflection Coefficients

If there is no sonic curve available for SynTool to use in generating
reflection coefficients, you can convert a resistivity into a pseudo-sonic.

December 2003 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters 54

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

1. From the SynTool Startup dialog box, select a resistivity curve to

be the RC Sonic.

2. Toggle on the Apply Transform checkbox and select the Faust

Equation option.

Select RC Density source

Select a Density Curve source for calculating the reflection coefficients
from the following choices:

• Curve. This option specifies which curve from the current project
database will be loaded as the RC Density. You do not need to pick
a density curve. Click on the Change button to see the Curve
Select dialog box. If you choose to select a curve from another
well, the curve you select for your session will be saved to the well
selected at startup—not to the well from which it was selected.
The curve will not be moved to the well selected at startup, it will
be copied and made available to the well selected at startup for the
current session and every time that session is accessed.

• Constant. Select this option to specify a constant density curve to

use for calculating reflection coefficients. Enter the desired density
in units of g/cm3.

• From RC P-Wave Sonic. Select this option to use the output of

the RC P-Wave Sonic curve as the RC Density. Select the proper
transform equation (normally, you would choose the Gardner to
convert the RC P-Wave Sonic curve from velocity to g/cm3).

Specify a Depth Range

SynTool requires a range below the depth datum to calculate a
synthetic. It uses the depth range of the RC P-Wave Sonic unless you
specify a different range:

• From RC P-Wave Sonic loads all log curves using the depth
range from the selected RC P-Wave Sonic (or RC Density).

• User allows you to change the Start and End depths to any value.
For example, starting at the time datum allows you to model the
shallow layer. You can pad the depth range of the RC P-Wave
Sonic by entering values that exceed its start/end depths or specify
a subzone by entering values within the RC P-Wave Sonic’s depth
range.

55 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

To select a depth range that differs from the depth range on your
curves, select the curves first and then change the User Depth
Range. The End depths must be greater than the Start depths.

Specify the Depth Sample Interval

Specify the depth sample interval to use for all depth logs loaded into
SynTool. SynTool requires that all well logs used for display and
calculation have a common start depth and sample interval. It
resamples logs as necessary ensuring that all logs have samples at the
same grid (depth) locations.

Sample intervals can be as small as you want. Keep in mind, however,

that smaller sampling intervals can consume more program memory
and increase computation and display times. Selecting a depth sample
interval that is less than the minimum interval of the RC sonic or RC
density log will not increase the accuracy of the synthetic seismogram
calculation.

• From RC P-Wave Sonic loads all log curves using the depth
sample interval from the selected RC P-Wave Sonic/Density. If the
RC P-Wave Sonic is irregularly sampled in the database, this
option is not available.

• User enters the depth sample interval to use when calculating the
synthetic.

Specify Processing
You can toggle on TVD and/or checkshot correction

• Apply TVD applies TVD corrections to all log curves.

• Apply Checkshots applies checkshot corrections to all log curves.

The ITT checkshot method is applied.

Once in SynTool, you can turn checkshots off, select a new survey,
or change the checkshot method by selecting Edit Process List
from the time-to-depth curve’s scale area popup menu.

December 2003 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters 56

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction and Applying Checkshots

Most checkshot surveys are designed, recorded, and processed to record

vertical travel times. For this reason, the sonic curve depths should almost
always be true-vertical-depth corrected before you apply the checkshot
correction.

If you are uncertain how the checkshot survey was prepared, and whether the
depths and times are truly vertical, please consult with the original checkshot
report provided by your contractor.

Applying TVD Corrections

TVD corrections can change the start time and start depth of all logs. If
you apply a time shift and then TVD corrections, the interval velocities
will change but the time shift value does not. However, the tie
characteristics will change. Any changes made to the sonic log affects
all logs and curves whether they are native in depth or native in time.

Applying Checkshots
The survey name and the number of time,depth pairs defined for both
the active and reference checkshot surveys are displayed in the
Checkshot Survey section of the dialog box.

After checkshot corrections are performed, the RC Sonic log’s

velocities are clipped to the specified minimum and maximum
velocities. If any amplitudes are clipped, a note appears indicating the
number of amplitudes that were clipped.

You can also generate a checkshot report or update the replacement

velocity; edit the checkshot survey, or select a survey from a different
well.

Checkshot Methods
Select one of the following checkshot methods:

Note: If you choose RC Sonic Indirectly as your time-to-depth source,

all checkshot methods described below will not produce artificial
reflection coefficients. This allows you to select a method that will
produce an exact match without worrying about boundary effects in
your RCs.

57 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• No Checkshots turns checkshot application off, or to remove any

checkshot corrections that have been applied.

• Interval Transit Time forces the integrated sonic log to exactly

match the (time,depth) pairs. Each interval transit time is added to
or subtracted from using a constant value in each checkshot
interval.

• Velocity + Interval Transit Time forces the integrated sonic log

to exactly match the (time,depth) pairs. The sonic log is first
corrected with a constant velocity adjustment followed by an
Interval Transit Time adjustment.

• Velocity does not exactly match the integrated sonic log to the
(time,depth) values. Corrections are made to the sonic by adding
or subtracting a constant velocity.

• Polynomial checkshot corrections smooth differences between

checkshot (time-depth) pairs and the integrated sonic log over the
entire sonic depth range. However, the Polynomial method will not
match the time-depth pairs and can result in misties. See the
Polynomial Checkshots section for more information.

Enter a polynomial order that is less than the number of checkshot

pairs. If this field is incorrect, SynTool issues a warning and
indicates how many pairs you have within the sonic’s range.

• Poly + Vel + ITT applies a polynomial correction, velocity

correction, and then an ITT correction. This method should make
the integrated sonic log match the time-depth pairs exactly.

Enter a polynomial order that is less than the number of checkshot

pairs. If this field is incorrect, SynTool issues a warning and
indicates how many pairs you have within the sonic’s range.

• Polynomial Test Report. for an analysis of several different

polynomial orders. Checkshots are not actually applied to the
curve. The results of the analysis are written to a disk file. This
report lists the checkshots pairs, the Initial and Final Mistie
Condition, and the residual variance, delta variance, and
coefficient of determination for each polynomial order tested.

December 2003 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters 58

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Polynomial Checkshots
Higher order polynomials give more exact matches between the
time-depth pairs and the integrated sonic, but may not be geologically
reasonable. This is because polynomial checkshot corrections smooth
differences between checkshot (time-depth) pairs and the integrated
sonic log over the entire sonic depth range.

As a result, subsequent checkshot corrections will not occur at the right

times (due to the nature of polynomial correction). Frequently, a third-
order polynomial gives better results.

Polynomials and Residual Variance

The polynomial degree that produces the largest decrease in residual
variance over lower order polynomials will produce the best
mathematical fit. However, this may not provide the best geological
checkshot correction (see note below). The residual variance is printed
in the Polynomial Test Report.

Polynomial Method and Checkshot Points

ITT and Polynomial correction both give the same replacement
velocity, but the Polynomial method will produce a shift (even if the
ITT doesn't).

SynTool calculates a replacement velocity based on the sonic before

polynomial correction. Since polynomial correction will alter the
average velocity in the interval between the start of the log and the first
checkshot, a shift is required to align the first checkshot. This is
intrinsic only to polynomial checkshot correction.

Polynomial corrections work to make the overall curve a reasonable fit,

but in doing so, the resulting curve will miss most of the checkshot
points. This is because the curve itself is constrained to a certain “best”
shape that comes as close as possible to the data points without actually
having to pass through the points.

After experimenting with the Polynomial method, try selecting RC

Sonic Indirectly as your time-to-depth source and apply the ITT or
Vel+ITT checkshot method. Insert checkshot diagnostic panes to
compare the results.

Calculating Polynomial Checkshots

59 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The Polynomial Checkshot correction is calculated in the following

manner:

• If you selected to display the master sonic log in units of velocity

(for example, ft/sec or m/sec), the sonic log is converted to interval
transit time (ITT).

• The sonic log interval transit times are then integrated (added
together) to produce the (Depth,Total Travel Time) curve, as
shown below.

5
Integrated Sonic

4
total travel time (sec)

2
1-way

10000

11000
1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000
Depth

• New checkshot pairs are fabricated at the start and end of the sonic
log if they do not already exist. SynTool uses the following
procedure to fabricate the “start” checkshot pair:

A) The new checkshot’s depth is set to the start of the sonic log.

B) The travel time is computed (by integrating the sonic log)

between the sonic log’s first depth value and the first checkshot
occurring within the sonic log’s depth range.

C) This time is subtracted from the time given for this first
“internal” checkshot pair.

• The last checkshot pair is fabricated in a similar manner.

December 2003 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters 60

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• The integrated sonic log’s total travel times are extracted at the
depths where checkshots occur, as shown in the illustration below:

5
X = Sonic Travel Time
4 0 = Checkshot Time
total travel time (sec)

2
1-way

1 Checkshot Point

10000

11000
1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000
Depth

• The difference is computed between the checkshot times and

integrated sonic times. These misties, often called the drift curve,
can be examined in the checkshot report. A graphical
representation is shown below.

+50 ms
mistie
(ms)

Depth
-50 ms

61 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• A polynomial of the specified order is then calculated to best fit the

misties, as shown below.

+50 ms 3rd order

polynomial
mistie
(ms)

Depth
-50 ms

• This derived polynomial is then added to the integrated sonic log.

4
total travel time (sec)

corrected sonic
3

2 original
integrated sonic
1-way

3rd order polynomial

1

10000

11000
1000

2000

3000

4000

5000

6000

7000

8000

9000

Depth
• The new mistie is then recalculated. This is reported as the Final
Mistie in the checkshot report.

• The integrated sonic log is finally differentiated to convert it back

to interval transit time.

If necessary, the sonic log is then converted back to velocities.

Saving a Session File and Exiting SynTool

To save your work and exit SynTool, perform the following steps:

December 2003 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters 62

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

1. Select File ➛ Exit from SynTool’s main menu to open a dialog

box prompting you to save checkshot changes.

2. Click on Yes to open the Save Checkshot dialog box.

3. Use this dialog to indicate whether you want the checkshot

changes to Replace Existing Survey or to be Saved as New
Survey.

4. When you see a prompt asking Do you wish to save a session file,
click on Yes to open the File selection dialog box.

5. Enter a filename in the Save session as text field.

SynTool automatically appends a .msc extension to the session file.

6. Click OK.

The next time you enter SynTool, this session file name appears at
the bottom of the File menu as one of the last four session files
saved. You can choose this menu option to return to the same well
and screen display you were viewing at the time you exited
SynTool.

63 Getting Started: Specifying Startup Parameters December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Working With the Interface

Once you have specified the startup parameters, the SynTool interface
displays.

If the display appears with empty panes...

If the SynTool display appears with empty panes after you start or open a
session, select Zoom to Sonic’s Extent from the Time/Depth Scale popup
menu.

This section offers workflows for working with the SynTool GUI:

• Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons

• Working with Panes

• Expert Keys

• Working with Views and Display

• Working With Picks

December 2003 - 64

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons

SynTool has many different way of getting to the menus. For example,
you can click MB3 within a pane to get a popup menu, use an icon, or a
mnueonic.

Pulldown Menus
Pulldown Menus are the top level menus that drop down when a
selection is made from the application’s main menu. From these menus,
you find the functions for Files, View, Panes, Picks, Extraction, and
Help.

Popup menus
SynTool refers to the vertical scale, log curves, synthetic traces, and
seismic sections as objects. Each object has its own popup menu that
allows you to delete, save, edit and change the display parameters.

Popup menus are location sensitive menus that appear from certain
areas in the application window. Using MB1 or MB3 they can be
accessed from the locations

Move the cursor to the location where you want the new curve to
appear and press Button 1 (the pane under the cursor moves to the
right).

Click MB3 on the scale area to access the database synthetic menu
options. Double-clicking in the scale area opens the process list
where you can change/apply options such as a filter,
scalar/multiplier, AGC or polarity.

You can open the Quick Access popup menu from anywhere within a
pane other than the main menu, empty scale or a curve’s or synthetic’s
scale area (including overlays). The Quick Access menu is controlled
by the variable QuickAccessMenu= in the .mirarc initialization file.

You can open the Quick Access popup menu from anywhere within a
pane other than the main menu, the Empty Scale or a curve or synthetic

65 Working With the Interface: Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

scale area (including overlays).

Quick Access

If this variable is edited, you must exit SynTool, then re-enter for the
option to take effect. The Quick Access menu will appear for all future
sessions or until you edit the QuickAccessMenu= variable in the
initialization file.

Cascading Menus
Cascading menus are submenus that appear from popup menus. They
offer additional options and commands. An arrowhead (triangle)
following the menu command indicates a Cascading Menu is attached
as shown in the example below.

indicates cascading menu

Selecting Menu Items

You can select menu items three different ways:

• Mouse. Move the mouse cursor to an item and press a mouse

button (MB1 for pulldown menus and MB3 for popup menus).

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons 66

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• Expert Keys. Use an expert key (for example, Ctrl-z) to execute

the menu item. Expert keys are not available for all menu
commands or options. If one is available, the keystroke or
keystroke sequence will appear to the right of the menu item in the
menu.

For example, to carry out the command to zoom the application

window, (Ctrl-z), press the Control key and the <z> key
simultaneously.

• Menu Mnemonic. Use a single key (mnemonic) to open a menu

or execute a command from the menu. The mnemonic is the
underlined letter appearing in the menu text (see the example
shown below).

The top level menu options are selected by pressing the Alt key plus
the underlined letter. To select an option from the resulting
pulldown menu, simply press the underlined letter only.

expert keys

menu mnemonic
(T, Z, n, V, etc.)

Use the arrow keys to navigate between menus. The menu

mnemonic for OS Window on the File menu is disabled when you
start a session.

Toolbar Icons
These icons allow quick access to the more frequently used commands.
The tool bar is located on the left side of the application window. The
number of icons that you actually see will depend on the screen
resolution and the current size of the SynTool application window. If

67 Working With the Interface: Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

you hold the mouse cursor over an icon, a brief description of that
icon’s function is written into the message area.

Icon Description

Time-Depth toggles the vertical scale of all objects, including seismic data,
between linear in time or linear in depth (using the time-depth curve’s velocities).
Time is represented as a clock; depth is represented as a ruler. (expert key: Ctrl-t)

Zoom lets you select a new start and end time (or depth) using the mouse.
Instructions are given in the message bar after this icon is selected. (expert key:
Ctrl-z)

Unzoom to back out of up to 20 previous zooms. (expert key: Meta-z)

Vertical Scale displays the Time/Depth Scale dialog box, containing commands to
modify the vertical scale limits, annotations, and gridding options.

Print. displays the Print dialog box, allowing you to print the current display.
(expert key: Ctrl-p)

Refresh Screen redraws the SynTool application window.

Log Pane displays the Select a Curve dialog box from which you can select a new
log curve.

SeisWorks Seismic Pane displays the selected either a 2D or 3D seismic section.

Seismic Pane displays the selected SEG-Y seismic section.

Pick Labels Pane displays well pick labels and pick lines. It also toggles pick
lines between on and off.

Synthetic Pane displays the selected synthetics. (expert key: Meta-s)

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons 68

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Icon Description

Database Synthetic Pane displays selected synthetic from the OpenWorks

database. The name of the current well is shown, but you can select a synthetic
from another well.

UnHide allows you to view one or more hidden panes. You can choose the panes
to unhide. (expert key: Ctrl-u)

Fit Panes Now forces all currently visible (unhidden) panes to be resized
horizontally.

Horizontal Grid Lines turns horizontal grid lines on or off. The grid increment is
specified in the Time/Depth Scale dialog box.

Pane Border.toggles the pane borders on or off.

Well Information displays general well information. This information is also

printed with reports and graphics printouts.

Calculation Sample Interval displays the Calc Sample Interval dialog box. It
allows you to enter a new sample interval in milliseconds.

69 Working With the Interface: Working with Menus, Popups, and Icons December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Working with Panes

Log curves, synthetic traces, and seismic data are called objects and
appear in separate panes. Each pane can display an object and an
overlay.

Note: You cannot overlay an object on the seismic/synthetic correlation

pane or the picks pane.

Default Panes
The SynTool default display appears with the following panes:

• 1-Time-Depth (time-to-depth source)

• A2-Sonic is the P-Wave sonic curve

• A3-Shear is the Shear sonic curve

• A4-Density is the density curve

• A5-Impedance is the autogenerated impedance curve

• A6-RC is the autogenerated reflection coefficient series

• A7-Syn is the autogenerated default synthetic

As you insert the corresponding objects to the display area, pane titles
changes to reflect the object name as shown in the following table:

Object Added Pane Title Display

Logs/curves A#-Log

Synthetics A#-Syn

Checkshot diagnostics #-Checkshots

Picks (formation labels #-Picks

and lines)

Seismic sections #-SEG-Y Seis (if from a SEG Y file)

SeisWorks Seis (if from SeisWorks 2D or 3D)

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Panes 70

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Adjusting Pane Borders

Pane borders help distinguish between the objects in the display area.
They can be turned off/on using View ➛ Preferences or the Adjust
Pane Borders icon.

Resizing a Pane
To resize a pane, drag the pane border slightly to the right to enlarge the
pane. Drag it to the left to make it smaller.

Notice that the scale area above the data is stretched or squeezed
depending on whether the pane is made larger or smaller.

Moving a Pane
To move a pane, drag and drop the pane to a new location. The pane
redisplays to the right of the dotted, vertical line.

Hiding a Pane
You cannot delete a default pane. However, you can hide the pane from
the display area.

Panes Main Menu

From the Panes menu you can add a new pane. Once a pane is
displayed, it has its own popup menu and options. You can also unhide
panes, force all panes to fit the application window width, and make
equal width panes.

Inserting a New Pane

You can insert the following pane types to the display. They appear to
the right of the default panes.

Inserting a New Database Log

To insert a pane containing a new database log.

1. Select Panes ➛ New Database Log or click on the Log Pane icon.

2. Click the pane location for the log.

71 Working With the Interface: Working with Panes December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

3. Select the curve type from the Select Curve dialog box. Or click
Change Well and select a curve from another well in the project.

Inserting Database Synthetic, RC, Synthetics, and Impedance

Panes
From the Panes menu, you can also insert panes for the following:

• Database Synthetic a synthetic from the current well.

Checkshot Diagnostics panes can be displayed in depth or time.

• Synthetic uses an RC curve for calculating the synthetic curve.

• RC log uses an impedance curve for calculating the RC curve.

• RC + Synthetic uses an impedance curve for calculating the RC

and Synthetic curves.

• Impedance uses sonic and density curves for calculating an

impedance curve. The impedance native domain is time.

• Impedance + RC uses sonic and density curves for calculating the

the impedance and RC curves.

• Impedance + RC + Synthetic uses sonic and density curves for

collating the impedance, RC, and synthetic curves.

Each curve has its own set of dialog boxes.

Inserting a Family of Panes

A pane that contains a series of curves: sonic, density, impedance, RC,
and synthetic is called a family. All panes within a family carry the
same letter designation in the title bar (A, B, C,...up to Z). The
maximum number of families is 26.

1. Select Panes ➛ Family...

2. Select a new family.

Inserting a Pick Labels Pane

See Working With Pick Labels for more information about pick labels.

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Panes 72

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

SeisWorks Seismic
See Adding Seismic Data for information about SeisWorks seismic.

SEG-Y file Seismic

See Working with Seismic for information about SEG-Y file seismic.

Adjusting Panes
From the Panes menu you can add new pane types and set the
appearance of all panes.

Hiding/Unhiding Panes
To hide/unhide panes in the display:

1. Select Panes ➛ Hide/ Unhide Panes

• Press Ctrl-u

• Click the Hide/Unhide Panes icon

2. Select the panes from the dialog box.

3. Click Select All and OK.

The unhidden panes display in their previous location.

Fitting Panes to the Window

To resize panes to fit all the window display:

• Select Panes ➛ Fit Panes Now

• Press Ctrl-f

• Click the Fit Panes Now icon

Select View ➛ Preferences to automatically use this option.

Setting Panes to Equal Width

To make all panes equal in width to the highlighted pane:

73 Working With the Interface: Working with Panes December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Select Panes ➛ Equal Width Panes

• Press Ctrl-q

• Click the Equal Width Pane icon

Hiding Multiple Panes

To hide a series of panes, select a pane holding Shift-MB1. Drag the
cursor over the set of panes that you want to hide. When all the pane
you want to delete are highlighted, release Shift-MB1. MB3 cancel the
request.

Maximizing/Restoring Panes
Double-click on the name in the pane title to maximize a pane. To
restore the pane to its original size, double-click on the name in the
pane title again.

Panes Control Menu

Use the Panes Control menu to adjust any pane and its object other than
the default panes.

Pane Control Menus and Default Objects

The Pane Control menu is not available for default objects. These are
the objects that appear in the default SynTool display after start-up.
Although the synthetic is included in the default display, it has a Pane
Control menu.

• Size changes the pane’s width

• Move moves the pane

• Delete deletes pane and all objects or families inside it. Objects,
families, or panes, are not deleted from the project database, they
are only deleted from the display.

• Hide hides the pane

• Unhide unhides one or more panes

• Unhide All unhides all currently hidden panes

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Panes 74

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• Title renames the pane

• Zoom zooms in vertically on all pane objects

• Unzoom unzooms to the previous zoom

Delete Object and Descendants vs. Delete Family

Suppose that you have two families, A and B, each with their own set of
sonic/density panes and you then create the C family whose sonic/density
panes are shared from the B family. If you then perform Delete Object and
Descendants from the sonic or density pane in the B family, all panes in both
the B and C families will be deleted.

By contrast, if you perform Delete Family in the same situation, only the B
panes are deleted and the sonic and density panes are reassigned to the C
family.

In the above example, if you add a D family with its own sonic/density
panes and then apply a filter from the B synthetic to the D synthetic,
performing Delete Object and Descendants on the B sonic will result in the
filter being reassigned from the B synthetic to the D synthetic. In this way,
filters will not be lost so long as they’re used elsewhere in the session even if
you use Delete Object and Descendants.

75 Working With the Interface: Working with Panes December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Expert Keys

Expert keys are keystrokes that execute a command without using the
mouse or opening a menu. Expert keys appear to the right of pulldown
menu items on the main menu bar. To use an expert key, you must press
a “control key” and then press another key while the control key is still
pressed. For example,

Ctrl-r Press the Control key and the r key simultaneously

Alt-z Press the Alt and the z key simultaneously.

Expert Keys Action Performed

Ctrl-p The Print/Plot dialog box appears. Set desired parameters, then click on OK.
(Same as File ➛ Print or clicking on the Printer icon )

Ctrl-r The Select Output Device dialog box appears. (Same as File ➛ Printer Select)

Ctrl-w The Well Info dialog box appears. Double-click on the window menu button
to close. (Same as File ➛ Show Well Info)

Ctrl-t Toggles the display between time and depth during a session (Same as View ➛
Time or clicking on the Time/Depth icon ).

Allows access to saved template files once the current session has been closed.
(Same as File ➛ Open Template)

Ctrl-n Opens a new SynTool session. Not available during a current session. Close the
current session before invoking this command. (Same as File ➛ New)

Ctrl-o Open a currently saved session file. Not available during a current session. Close
the current session before invoking this command. (Same as File ➛ Open Session)
Ctrl-c Closes the current session and prompts you to save the current session. Returns
SynTool to the main application window. (Same as File ➛ Close)

Ctrl-s Opens a dialog box prompting you to save the current/new session. (Same as File
➛ Save Session)
Ctrl-e Opens a dialog box prompting you to save the session file as a template file. (Same
as File ➛ Save Template)

Ctrl-x Prompts you to save your session, then exits the SynTool application. (Same as
File ➛ Exit)

Ctrl-z Invokes the zoom command. (Same as View ➛ Zoom or clicking on the Zoom
icon )

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Expert Keys 76

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Expert Keys Action Performed

Alt-z Unzooms the display. (Same as View ➛ Unzoom or clicking on the Unzoom icon
)

Ctrl-v The Time Scale dialog box appears. Set desired parameters, then click on OK.
(Same as Time-Depth Scale popup menu ➛ Scale or clicking on the Vertical Scale
icon )

Ctrl-u The Unhide Panes Select dialog box appears. Select the panes you want to unhide,
then click on OK. (Same as Panes ➛ Unhide Panes or clicking on the Unhide
Panes icon )

Ctrl-f Resizes unhidden panes to fill the application window. (Same as Panes➛ Fit Panes
Now or clicking on the Fit Panes Now icon )

Ctrl-q Resizes all unhidden panes to the width of the currently selected pane. (Same as
Panes ➛ Equal Width Panes)
Alt-o Opens a UNIX window. (Same as File ➛ OS Window)

Alt-s Invokes the command to insert a Synthetic pane. Press Button 1 where you want
the pane to appear. (Same as Panes ➛ Synthetic or clicking on the Synthetic icon
)

F1 The SynTool online help window appears.

77 Working With the Interface: Expert Keys December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Working with Views and Display

Quick Access

Zoom
At the left edge of SynTool’s main window is a tool bar containing
several icons that let you quickly perform several frequently selected
functions such as the zoom function.

To zoom the vertical scale

1. Click on the zoom icon shown at left or press Ctrl+z.

2. Move the cursor to the Time-Depth scale or any of the other

curves. The zone you want to zoom in on ranges from about 900
ms to about 1500 ms. Use the Time (ms) readout at the bottom,
right of the application window as a guide.

3. Point to the top of the zone you want to zoom (about 900 ms).
Drag the cursor down to the bottom of the zone (about 1500 ms). If
the zoom box is not easily visible, change the PaneXORColor
setting in the .mirarc file.

All curves in the window and the Time-Depth scale redraw

according to the newly defined vertical scale.

To unzoom the display, press Alt-z or click on the unzoom icon

shown at left. You can also boost the synthetic trace amplitude if
necessary.

Vertical Scale

Calculator
SynTool provides examples for calculating programs in the .mirarc
initialization file. Simply remove the semi-colon (;) in front of the
CalcApp= variable corresponding to the system you are using. This
setting remains in effect for all future SynTool sessions. To change the
calculator program later, you must edit the CalcApp= entry in the
.mirarc file.

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Views and Display 78

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

If the variable remains commented out, you will be prompted to supply

a calculator program as described in the procedure below.

1. Select File ➛ Calculator from the main menu.

If the calculator does not appear, you are prompted to enter the
command line for the calculator program you want to use.

2. Enter the program name and path to the executable.

3. Click on OK. The calculator program you choose for the

CalcApp= entry will appear the next time you select File ➛
Calculator from the main menu.

View Preferences Parameters

Select View ➛ Preferences to display the View Preferences dialog
box. From this dialog box you can set screen display preferences such
as borders, grid style, and screen calibration.

You can toggle the View options in this dialog box on or off. If the
checkbox is green or darkened, the option is toggled on. The available
View options are described below.

Show Pane Borders

Displays pane borders.

Thin Pane Borders

Displays thin pane borders when Show Pane Borders is toggled on.

Show ToolBar
Displays the SynTool icon tool bar.

79 Working With the Interface: Working with Views and Display December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Fit Panes when App Resizes

The pane widths automatically adjust to fill the application window
every time the application window is resized.

Hide Empty Scales

Hides any empty scale bars. You can still select their popup menus.

Clip Time/Depth Grid Lines

If this option is toggled on, the vertical scale’s grid lines are not
connected across the screen. If this option is toggled off, the vertical
scale’s grid lines appear continuously (connected between panes)
across the screen.

Grid Style
Toggle on to display the Grid Styles dialog box.

Major Grid

Minor Grid
Major Grid and Minor Grid refer to horizontal depth or timing lines
across all panes. The Time/Depth Scale major and minor grid
increments are set in the Time Scale dialog box (path: Time/Depth
Scale ➛ Scale).

Grid options include the following:

• Solid

• Dashed

• Dot

• Dash-Dot

• Dash-Dot-Dot

When gridding options are set for individual objects, Major and Minor
Grid refer to vertical grid lines for the current object or pane. The major

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Views and Display 80

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

and minor grid increments are set in each object’s Scale or View
Options dialog box.

The Gridding option can be chosen from the Time/Depth Scale popup
menu. It is also available from the Annotations Options panel in the
View Options dialog box, or by clicking on the Horizontal Grid Lines
icon. The Grid Lines icon only turns off/on major grid lines.

Turning off gridlines

1. Select Gridding from the Time/Depth Scale popup menu to reveal
the cascading menu shown at left.

2. Toggle on/off both the Major Grid and/or Minor Grid.

Calibrate Screen
Calibrating the screen is not usually necessary for Motif versions of
SynTool so you may ignore this step if you are getting properly scaled
displays on screen.

Enter the dimensions in the Width and Height fields. Toggle on either
inches or centimeters.

Grid Color Parameters

Select View ➛ Grid Color to display the Color Selection palette. This
sets the grid color for all horizontal and vertical grid lines; these grid
lines can be changed at any time during a session.

The Color Selection palette is a grid of 64 OpenWorks colors available

for selected objects. The Color option can be chosen from the Seismic
scale area popup menu.

BK and FG on the color palette refer to the colors for the variables
ScreenBackClr= and ScreenForeClr= respectively, in the .mirarc file.

Some printers reverse the colors for black and white. For example, if
your screen’s foreground color is white and its background is black, but
your printer’s foreground color is black and its background is white
(paper), then selecting a foreground color of white on screen will cause
it to print black. Some colors will not print well due to dithering. To get
the best hardcopy results, use bright colors and black and white. Avoid
dark colors and grays.

81 Working With the Interface: Working with Views and Display December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Changing Curve Color in SynTool

All displayed curves appear in the color for that type of curve as listed in the
OpenWorks Curve Dictionary. Changing the color in SynTool only applies
for the session. To change the color permanently, you must edit the color in
the OpenWorks Curve Dictionary.

Time Parameters

Changing Between Time and Depth

Select View ➛ Time from the main menu. The default view is
time.Toggle whether the data is displayed in time or depth. If Time has
been selected, a darkened or green checkbox indicates data is displayed
in time. Right-clicking any curve and selecting View Time from the
popup menu works the same as this option.

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working with Views and Display 82

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Working With Picks

Picks are text descriptions describing an event at a particular log depth.

Picks typically annotate geologic formation changes. Picks can be
displayed in their own pane or as an overlay. Select Picks from
SynTool’s main menu or from the object’s popup to display the Picks
Menu.

SynTool can only work with picks that are stored in the OpenWorks
database in depth. Picks stored in time cannot be displayed.

Display Preferences Parameters

Selecting Text Color for Picks

To select a text color, select Picks ➛ Text Color to open a color
palette.

Pick line color is read from the OpenWorks database. However, some
picks may not display because they have not been assigned a color. To
change pick line color or to assign a color, use the OpenWorks
Surface/Fault Data Manager, or edit the LabelLineColor variable in the
.mirarc file. Any picks that have not been assigned a color in
OpenWorks are displayed in SynTool with the color you assign to the
LabelLineColor variable).

Generating Reports
SynTool reports are available for a number of objects, such as
formation labels, checkshot corrections, and TVD information. When
SynTool generates a report, a file is created that contains the text of the
report.

1. Select Picks ➛ Generate Report to open the File dialog box.

2. Enter a name for the report file such as:

<your initials>_picks.rpt

Provide the .rpt extension to remind you that this is a report file.

Report files are written to a directory specified by the

ReportDirectory= variable in the .mirarc initialization file.

83 Working With the Interface: Working With Picks December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

This text file can be viewed by any program that can read unformatted
ASCII text. The default program that SynTool will send your report to
is controlled by the FileViewer= entry in the .mirarc initialization file.

Turning on Show Lines

Select Picks ➛ Show Lines to turn the display of lines on or off.
Objects that have pick labels displayed as an overlay and have pick
label lines turned on will not be affected.

Pick Labels Options

These options only affect labels displayed on top of the object on which
they are overlaid. To change global label display attributes, such as
color and line style, use the main menu’s Picks ➛ Display Preferences
and Text Color options:

• View None turns off pick label annotation for the currently
selected object.

• View Text and Lines enables pick label text annotation and lines
display for the selected object.

• View Lines Only enables pick label lines display for the selected
object (no text is displayed)

• Select Picks to select picks for display.

• Transparent Text allows you to “see through” the text annotation

used for pick labels. If toggled off, a rectangle is blanked out
underneath the pick label text.

• Justification Left, Center, Right determines how pick label text

is justified within a pane. If the label text is too long to fit in a
pane, it is clipped and an * appears as the last or first character in
the pick name. To prevent clipping of labels, make the pane wider
or change the clipping attribute using the main menu’s Display ➛
Preferences option.

• Scale Color Controls pick label scale area color displays the
color selection palette.

• Scale Width controls pick label scale area width.

• Delete Object deletes selected objects.

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working With Picks 84

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Selecting Picks to Display

Select Pick Labels ➛ Select Picks to Display from an object’s popup
menu, or from a Pick Labels popup menu, to open the Picks Selection
dialog box.

This dialog box contains two lists: a list of picks to display and a list of
picks to hide. The buttons in the center are used to move picks from
one list to the other.

• Add adds selected pick(s) to the display list.

• Remove removes the selected pick(s) from the display list to the
hide list.

• Add All moves everything in the hide list to the display list.

• Remove All moves everything in the display list to the hide list.

• Add by Interpreter adds interpreters from a list whose picks you

want to display.

• Remove by Interpreter hides interpreters picks from the display.

OpenWorks allows interpreters to make multiple picks of a surface

in a wellbore. A pick observation number to the right of the pick
name and interpreter differentiates multiple picks made by the same
interpreter.

Pick Troubleshooting

SynTool picks not lining up in SeisWorks

Sometimes well tops do not line up in SeisWorks the same as they do in
SynTool. There are several reasons why.

Incorrect Workflow
Did you do one of the following?

• performed a (depth) stretch/squeeze using the Edit Data ➛

Thickness Edit.

• changed top depths so they stay lined up to the log character

85 Working With the Interface: Working With Picks December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• saved a TD table and exited SynTool

• viewed the picks in SeisWorks and discovered they did not line up
at the right character points

• restarted SynTool, selected the depth stretched curves, and the

picks no longer lined in SynTool either

SynTool internally moves picks in depth to accommodate the

stretch/squeeze operation, but SynTool does not save the new pick
depths to the database. SynTool does not allow you to save picks.
Edited picks are only valid during the current SynTool session.

If SynTool did allow you to save the stretched/squeezed picks, the picks
would be correct for the stretched curves, but would be at the wrong
depths for the original, unstretched well curves.

December 2003 Working With the Interface: Working With Picks 86

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Workflows

This section describes the menus and workflow for the SynTool objects.
The default display has seven panes to work with; you can add, delete,
process, or change the objects.

• Adding Seismic Data

• Extracting Seismic

• Working with Database Synthetics

• Synthetic Correlation Options

• Synthetics

• TIme Depth Scale

• Working with Curves

December 2003 - 88

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Adding Seismic Data

Seismic is added as a pane or an overlay. You can either add 2D or 3D

SeisWorks seismic or SEG-Y Seis from a SEG-Y file.

Inserting SeisWorks Seismic

Select Panes ➛ SeisWorks Seismic to create a seismic pane. SynTool
only displays SeisWorks datasets in the Time domain. It accepts .3dv,
.bri, and .cmp 3D file types.

Well Options are for the Current Well Selected in SynTool

Several options in the seismic selection process allow you to select seismic
data nearest to the current well or you can select from seismic data at the
center location of the well. This well is the well you selected at the start of
your SynTool session. If you want to select seismic sections from a location
around another well, you must start a new session.

SeisWorks Seismic Pane Selection Parameters

There are two versions of this dialog box depending on whether you
selected a 2D or 3D project.

SeisWorks Projects and Seismic Files

You can use the Search/Filter String field to filter both the SeisWorks
Projects and Seismic Files lists. For instance, typing in 3dv in the right
Search/Filter field and clicking Filter filters the list so that only 3dv
projects appear. Typing dip and clicking Search locates and selects the
dip file. Clicking Reset resets the list to its original contents.

The seismic files appears in the list to the right of the SeisWorks
Projects list. If new seismic files are added to the project during a
session, click Reinitialize List.

Select lines or traces

Select Line or Trace. You can key in a value or use the horizontal scroll
bar to navigate through lines/traces in the seismic file. Specify the
corresponding First/Last Trace or First/Last Line to display.

89 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Arbitrary Line from SeisWorks PD

Toggle on to transfer SeisWorks Seismic View window contents to
SynTool through the Pointing Dispatcher (PD). It displays a line
between two arbitrary points (point-to-point) from a SeisWorks
Seismic View.

Select Nearest
This is the default. Displays a range of traces nearest to the current well
bottom-hole location for the line or trace you selected. This option is
ignored for 2D projects.

Center at Well
Display a range of traces centered on the current well bottom-hole
location for the line or trace you selected. Enter the number of traces to
display on either side of the well. The default is 10.

Maximum Search Distance

Searches for traces within a specified distance of the well bottom-hole
location. If there are no traces found within this distance, you will
receive a popup message. You can then respecify the value. You are
also informed of the actual projected distance to the selected line if it is
within the Maximum Search Distance range. This read-only field is
automatically updated.

Restore Selection from PD

Restores the original seismic section with a default range of traces
centered at the nearest well closest to the midpoint of the seismic
selection sent from SeisWorks.

Restore Range from PD

Restores the original seismic section line or trace range. This is the
entire range of your point-to-point selection. This range is displayed in
the First Trace/Last Trace text fields.

After you click OK, if the time datum for the seismic section is
different from the current time datum, you are prompted to correct it.

December 2003 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data 90

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Inserting SEG-Y file Seismic

Select Panes ➛ SEG-Y file Seismic to create a seismic pane. Select a
directory and file. If the SEG-Y file was not generated with SynTool,
you are prompted for the file format: IEEE or Standard. SynTool
generated files are in standard format.

Time Datum and SynTool Generated SEG-Y Files

When reading SEG-Y files generated with SynTool versions 3.x and
greater, SynTool automatically changes the time datum to the value
specified in the SEG-Y header or .lst file.

If working with SynTool pre3.x generated SEG-Y files, you will have
to manually change the time datum from Time-Depth pane ➛ Datum
Info. You also have to change the Distance Between Traces option in
the Seismic Scale dialog box.

If the sample rate is different from the current sessions’s sample rate,
you are prompted to change the current sample interval to match the
seismic data.

Seismic Pane Menus

SEG-Y and SeisWorks Seismic panes have popup menus that allow you
to Scale, Scale Width, Edit color, Extract wavelets, run synthetic
correlation and add overlays.

Adding a Seismic Overlay

Select Add overlay from the seismic pane menu. Select one of the
following types of overlay for your seismic:

• Database Log adds any depth domain curve in the project

database using the Curve Select dialog box

• Database Synthetic adds any synthetic loaded to the database

• Synthetic adds synthetic

• RC adds an RC log

• Impedance adds an impedance log (calculated in the time domain

from the RC Sonic and/or RC Density logs)

91 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Pick Labels adds pick label annotations

Specify the CDP to place the middle of the overlay scale.

• SEG-Y seismic data is displayed over the well top hole location.

• SeisWorks seismic data is displayed over the perpendicular

projection of the well bottom hole location onto the seismic line.

Tie Wells to Seismic

For wells lying exactly on the seismic line and geology that is relatively
flat with no dip in any direction, the proper CDP location is the physical
tie point between the well head and the seismic line. This is true even if
the well is deviated. However, for more complex geologic structures,
the best CDP location for an overlay may be away from the well head.

Setting Scale Parameters

Select Scale from the seismic pane menus.

Primary Label and/or Secondary Label

The default Primary Label shows the project, line number and seismic
file name for SeisWorks seismic data. The default primary label for a
SEG-Y file shows the seismic filename. The default Secondary Label
displays the trace number.

Unscaled
Toggle on to computes a trace spacing that shows all traces between the
Right Value and Left Value in the current pane.

Traces/in or Traces/cm
Toggle on the traces scale specified in the TPI (Traces Per Inch) or
TPCM (Traces Per CentiMeter) field.

m/in or m/cm.
Toggle on the traces scale specified in the ft/in or ft/cm text field. (Feet
or meter unit designations are determined by the measurement system
chosen the first time the session was started. It can be changed by

December 2003 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data 92

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

selecting a new Measurement System setting in OpenWorks Command

Menu ➛ Project ➛ Project Status Tool, Options menu ➛ Change
Measurement System.

Distance Between Traces

Enter the actual distance between CDPs. When displaying seismic
sections from SeisWorks or SynTool generated SEG-Y files, this field
is automatically adjusted.

CDP Range
Enter the range of CDPs displayed in the seismic pane scale area.
Entering values outside this range will shrink the seismic display and
add the specified number of CDP values.

• Left Value, enter a starting CDP scale area display value.

• Right Value, enter an ending CDP scale area display value.

• Reverse Scale, toggle on to reverse the scale area annotation to

right-left.

Annotation

First Value to annotate

The CDP number from which all text annotation will be referenced. If
this value is set to zero SynTool will determine a value automatically.

Annotation Increment
Enter the increment between text annotations and major grid lines.
Annotations increment from the First Value to Annotate. Enter 0 to
determine a value that works with the current scale width and font size.

Minor Grid Increment

Enter the increment between minor axis tick marks and minor grid
lines. Enter 0 to determine a value that works with the current scale
width and font size.

93 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Grids
Toggle one of the following grids:

Show Major Grid

Displays the scale area’s major grid lines based on the Annotation
Increment.

Show Minor Grid

Displays the scale area’s minor grid lines based on the Minor Grid
Increment.

Display Style
Toggle on one of the following display styles:

Trace
Display in Variable Area or Wiggle.

Line
Select a line style for the seismic traces.

Multiplier
When you change one of the following fields the other fields will
change. For example, change Amplitude at 1 trace deflection and the
Trace Overlap % changes.

Amplitude at 1 trace deflection

Enter the number of amplitude units to insert between traces. A trace of
the specified amplitude has a deflection of exactly one trace.

Bias
Enter a Bias to nudge the data to the left or right if it is not centered on
zero.

December 2003 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data 94

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Trace Overlap %.
Enter a percentage for the seismic display trace overlap.

For more information about overlays, see Editing Curves.

Viewing a SEG-Y Report File (.lst)

Using Seis2D/3D to SEG-Y option, you can write SEG-Y files from
2D (lines) or 3D (lines, traces, or arbitrary) SeisWorks projects. If
working from a .3dv file, arbitrary lines must be straight.

SynTool writes a report file on the SEG-Y file called <SEG Y

filename>.lst. This report file lists input and output CDPs and average
trace separation. You can use this information when displaying
deviated wells over seismic data. A northing angle has also been
calculated into the file to assist you in coding an azimuth. The time
datum for the seismic data is also shown.

If you did not toggle on View list file, you can view the file in an xterm
window.

1. From an xterm window, type: cd /<directory name or path

to your SEG Y files>

All .lst filenames will be between the .sgy and .xgy filenames for
the SEG-Y file.

2. At the prompt, type: more <SEG Y filename>.lst.

SEG Y Format
SynTool can read two types of SEG Y seismic data formats—16-bit
integer and 32-bit floating point. SynTool cannot read Landmark 8 bit
SEG Y formatted data created in SeisWorks. For example, you cannot
use the Panes ➛ SEG-Y file Seismic menu option to display
SeisWorks created SEG Y data in SynTool. SynTool can create the
equivalent SEG Y data you created in SeisWorks, then convert it to 32-
bit IBM floating point format using the SegPort utilities or using the
SeisWorks Seismic option.

True SEG Y seismic data has all of its floating point numbers stored in
IBM mainframe binary format (Standard). However, some third party
seismic programs can only read SEG Y data that has been converted to

95 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

a different floating point format (IEEE). Most data in SynTool is

Standard format.

SynTool will allow you to read both formats. However, you must
specify which format the data is stored in the very first time you open
the seismic file.

Specify the Correct SEG Y format.

Specifying the wrong SEG Y format may cause SynTool to crash! Please
make sure you have saved any important data (checkshots, labels, TVD,
etc.) before trying to read a new SEG Y file. If you answer the dialog box
shown on the previous page incorrectly, SynTool will write a bad index file
and you will not be able to read the SEG Y file until you manually delete the
index file (.xgy) as explained on page 96.

SynTool can read the following seismic data formats:

SEGY Data Format Read Capability

SEGY 16-bit integer Yes

SEGY 32-bit floating point Yes

SEGY 32-bit integer No

SynTool can only read SEG Y files with CDP numbers that increment
by one. If your SEG-Y file does not increment CDPs by one, you can
renumber the CDPs using the segynum utility. The path is as follows:

$OWHOME/SynTool/bin

where $OWHOME is the path where SynTool is installed on

your system.

Segynum is a command line utility. To run it type: segynum in an

xterm window and follow the instructions it gives you.

SEG Y Index File (.xgy)

When you specify the format (IEEE or Standard), SynTool creates an
index file (.xgy) to store the format you have provided, along with
additional information, in the same directory as the .sgy file. If you
specify the wrong SEG Y format, SynTool will write a bad index file
(.xgy) and you will not be able to read the desired SEG Y file until you
manually delete the bad index file. To delete a bad .xgy index file

December 2003 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data 96

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

1. From an xterm window

• Type: cd /<path to corrupt .xgy index file>

Since the .xgy file resides in the same directory as the .sgy file, the .sgy
file will be located in your home directory or in the directory specified
by the SegyDirectory= variable in the .mirarc initialization file.

Remove Only the Index File (.xgy)

Index files have the same base name as the .sgy file. If removing
index files, make sure you select the filename with the .xgy
extension.

• Type: rm <filename>.xgy

2. Reselect the seismic file you want to display, and specify the
correct format.

SEG Y File (.sgy) Troubleshooting

SynTool can display the following error messages when trying to read
SEGY files (.sgy):

“Error opening SEGY file”

Check to see that the directory containing the .sgy file you want to
access has full permissions. If the directory does not have full
permissions, SynTool cannot create the .xgy file to store the format. If
your directory does not have full permissions. From an xterm window,

cd /<path to directory containing .sgy file>

chmod 777 <directory containing .sgy file>

SynTool cannot read SEG Y data

Check that the version is not preSynTool v3.0 SEG Y file (.sgy). Before
SynTool can read any preSynTool v3.0 SEG Y file, you must first
delete the accompanying .xgy file. You can then display the SEG Y file.
Also, check to see that the file system containing the data is not
mounted read-only. If the system is mounted read-only, SynTool cannot
create the .xgy file to store the format in the .sgy file.

97 Workflows: Adding Seismic Data December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Extracting Seismic

SynTool gives you two methods for extracting seismic wavelets: mixed
phase and autocorrelation. You can also launch SeisWell and extract
wellbore seismic from the extraction menu.

Mixed Phase Extraction Technique

SynTool’s mixed phase extraction technique extracts a minimum phase
wavelet computed from the reflection coefficients and seismic data over
one or more traces.

In areas of steeply dipping data the number of traces should be kept to a

minimum to prevent a blurring effect on the extracted wavelet. An
extracted wavelet is produced for each seismic trace defined. The
extracted wavelets are then summed and averaged to produce the final
output wavelet. Before extracting a mixed-phase wavelet, you should

• make sure that any bulk time differences are corrected using the
Synthetic Correlation pane

• determine start and ending times within an area of the seismic data
with good signal characteristics

• make sure the sampling interval is the same as the seismic data.

Implementation of the mixed phase wavelet extraction method requires

that the time sample interval of the seismic data match that of the
reflection coefficients. Therefore, whenever a SEG-Y file is displayed
in SynTool, you will be prompted to change the current sample interval
to match the seismic data. Answer Yes to avoid having to exit the
Wavelet Extraction dialog box and manually change the sample
interval.

Wiener-Levinson Mixed Phase Wavelet Extraction

SynTool calculates the output wavelet internally using these steps:

• autocorrelates RC’s over length of filter - ACOR, then

crosscorrelates the seismic trace with RC’s - XCOR.

• uses Wiener-Levinson algorithm to solve simultaneous equations,

adds this extracted wavelet to the extracted wavelet sum, then adds
seismic data in the frequency domain

December 2003 Workflows: Extracting Seismic 98

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• divides seismic data in the frequency domain by the number of

traces, then converts the summed, normalized seismic to the
spectral frequency domain

• converts computed wavelet to the spectral frequency domain, and

computes minimum spectral value from the seismic, then zeros the
frequency component in the computed wavelet if the amplitude for
the frequency is less than the minimum

• converts the computed wavelet back to the time domain, and

normalizes the wavelet, and performs Hamming smoothing of the
extracted wavelet if DoHammingForMixed=1 is defined in the
.mirarc initialization file. The default is to not perform Hamming
smoothing

• posts error estimation values in the message area of the SynTool

display (showing minimum, maximum and average)

Avoiding Frequencies not Within the Seismic Data

Because SynTool uses the RCs in this Wiener-Levinson extraction, it is

possible to get frequencies in the extracted wavelet that are not within the
original seismic data. To remedy this, a pass is made through the seismic
data, in the frequency domain, to determine which frequencies have
acceptable amplitude. The MinFFTAmpPercent parameter in the .mirarc
initialization file defines a percentage of the maximum amplitude in the
frequency domain which is considered as being a contributing frequency to
the extracted wavelet.

A value of 1.0 (1 percent), allows most frequencies from the seismic data to
be contained in the extracted wavelet. A value of 50 or higher will allow
only the dominant frequencies of the seismic data to be within the extracted
wavelet. Caution should be used when defining this percentage above 10
percent or more. Tests should be done with varying percentages and the
resulting wavelets viewed in the filter spectral display to determine the
optimal parameters for your data.

Autocorrelation Wavelet Extraction Technique

SynTool’s autocorrelation wavelet extraction method extracts a wavelet
from a specified time window over one or more traces. Geologic dip
across the trace window will not affect the accuracy of the wavelet
extraction.

Autocorrelation functions are always zero-phase. The autocorrelation

function (wavelet) will also match the frequency spectrum of the
seismic data in the time-CDP window you select.

99 Workflows: Extracting Seismic December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

SynTool calculates the output wavelet using these steps:

• Computes the autocorrelation function individually for each trace

between Start Trace and End Trace.

• Computes the mathematical average of the autocorrelation

functions.

• Takes the square root of amplitudes in the frequency domain.

You can decide not to take the square root of the frequencies by
defining AutoCorrSquareRoot=0 in the .mirarc initialization file.
The default is to take the square root; aAutoCorrSquareRoot=1.

• Applies a taper to the autocorrelation function so its amplitude is 0

at the desired filter length.

• Truncates the autocorrelation function to the desired length.

Setting Default Extraction Parameters

Select Extract ➛ Extraction Options to set the default options for
saving an extracted wavelet from this session.

Save Wavelet

To Database
When you select To Database, the Wavelet Save dialog box appears.
You can either Replace Wavelet or create a New Wavelet. When you
select a New Wavelet, you must supply the following information:

• Interpreter name of the current interpreter

• Source name of the current application.

• Zero Index is the sample number of the zero time reference of the
wavelet

• Sample Interval for the wavelet

• Length (points) is the number of points in the wavelet

• Remarks about the wavelet

December 2003 Workflows: Extracting Seismic 100

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Toggle on Save Dephasing Operator to append DPHS to the name of

the wavelet. This inverse filter can then be accessed by PostStack and
applied to the seismic dataset. Once PostStack has completed the
operation the resultant seismic dataset should be zero phase.

To ASCII File
When you select to save To ASCII file, SynTool automatically gives
extracted ASCII wavelets the .wvl extension.

View Graph
Displays the extracted wavelet. You can use the Wavelet Spectra Editor
to edit extracted values. This option is not available when extracting a
wavelet from SEG-Y files.

View Value
Works with To ASCII File and displays the values being saved to the
ASCII file.

Source Seismic Pane Options

• Keep displays a synthetic overlay on the panel that the extraction
was performed. 3D Pane Type and 3D Section Passes Through
options are disabled with this option.

• Replace the seismic pane used for wavelet extraction by the new
seismic pane and wavelet overlay.

• New is the default. After the wavelet is saved, a new seismic pane
appears with the extracted wavelet as an overlay at the location
specified during the extraction process.

3D Pane Type
Line is the default and is trace-oriented. Select Trace for line-oriented
panes.

3D Section Passes Through

Select the preferred path for seismic lines (or traces) drawn in SynTool.

101 Workflows: Extracting Seismic December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Extraction Bottomhole Location is the default. It passes through

the location where the wavelet was extracted.

• Well Bottomhole Location passes through the actual well

bottomhole location, regardless of where the wavelet was
extracted.

Traces Either Side of Well

Enter the number of traces or lines to display on either side of the well.
If the 3D Pane Type is set to Trace, enter the number of lines to
display on either side of the well.

Overlay Synthetic
These options control where SynTool displays synthetic overlays
resulting from wavelet extraction. You also have the option to not
display the synthetic.

No Synthetic Overlay
The extracted wavelet is saved but not displayed.

At Extraction Bottomhole Location (default)

The displayed wavelet is centered over the bottomhole extraction
location.

At Well Bottomhole Location

The displayed wavelet is centered over the bottomhole well location.

For more information about overlays, see Editing Curves.

Launching SeisWell
See SeisWell for information. (LINK)

Extracting Wellbore Seismic

Extract seismic amplitudes along paths that are parallel to deviated
wellbores. The result of this extraction is saved as a new SeisWorks

December 2003 Workflows: Extracting Seismic 102

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

project .3dv file (for 3D data) or .2v2 file (for 2D data). This file is used
for accurate wavelet extractions and synthetic correlations based on the
actual seismic samples through which the wellbore passes.

Select Extract ➛ Wellbore Seismic to open the Wellbore Seismic

Selection dialog box.

Wellbore Seismic Pane Selection Parameters

There are two versions of this dialog box depending on whether you
selected a 2D or 3D project.

SeisWorks Projects and Seismic Files

You can use the Search/Filter String field to filter both the SeisWorks
Projects and Seismic Files lists. For instance, typing in 3dv in the
Search/Filter field and clicking Filter, filters the list so that only 3dv
projects appear. Typing dip and clicking Search locates and selects the
dip file. Clicking Reset resets the list to its original contents.

The seismic files appears in the list to the right of the SeisWorks
Projects list. If new seismic files are added to the project during a
session, click Reinitialize List.

Select lines or traces

Select Line or Trace. You can key in a value or use the horizontal scroll
bar to navigate through lines/traces in the seismic file. Specify the
corresponding First/Last Trace or First/Last Line to display.

Displaying ranges of traces

Select Nearest
This is the default. Displays a range of traces nearest to the current well
bottom-hole location for the line or trace you selected. This option is
ignored for 3D projects.

103 Workflows: Extracting Seismic December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Center at Well
Display a range of traces centered on the current well bottom-hole
location for the line or trace you selected. Enter the number of traces to
display on either side of the well. The default is 10.

Maximum Search Distance

Searches for traces within this distance of the well bottom-hole
location. If there are no traces found within this distance, you receive a
popup message. You can then enter a new value. You are also informed
of the actual projected distance to the selected line if it is within the
Maximum Search Distance range. This read-only field is automatically
updated.

Output filename
Enter an Output Filename for the extracted seismic data. The filename
can be up to six characters for 3D files, but must be exactly nine
characters for 2D files. You do not need to enter a 3D extent number
such as “01” or a file extension such as “.3dv”.

Compressed and Bricked Formats

SynTool does not write the new compressed (.cmp) and bricked (.bri)
3D seismic formats. Only .3dv format is available within this feature.
Use the Seismic Data Converter in OpenWorks to convert these files to
the newer formats.

Click Reinitialize List to list this file in your list of Seismic Files
for the selected SeisWorks Project.

Center Well Location

Center At Tophole or Center at Bottomhole.

Tophole versus Bottomhole

For most uses in SynTool, centering around the bottomhole is the best
choice, since SynTool primarily uses bottomhole as the default well
location. However, if you plan to use the output file in SeisWorks, center
at tophole since the Display Vertical option in SeisWorks uses the
tophole location. If you choose the tophole location, you are prompted
to confirm your selection before the output file is written.

December 2003 Workflows: Extracting Seismic 104

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

If the time datum is different from the current sessions’s time datum,
you are prompted to change the current time datum to match the
seismic data.

Extracting a Seismic Wavelet

Select Extract Wavelet from the scale area popup menu to open the
Wavelet Extraction dialog box.

Input Parameters
The default Start and End times are determined by the time range
of the logs and seismic data.

• If extracting an autocorrelation wavelet, only seismic data/times

are used.

• If extracting a mixed phase wavelet, both the RCs and seismic data
must have good data in this time window.

View Parameters
Select Graph for a Wavelet Spectra Editor window.

Select Values for ASCII wavelet values.

Output parameters

Extraction Method
Select Autocorrelation (zero phase) or Wiener-Levinson mixed phase
extraction method.

Output Type
Select from OpenWorks Database, Landmark ASCII, or Old
Mira/DOS ASCII.

Length of Wavelet
Specify a length in milliseconds for the output wavelet.

105 Workflows: Extracting Seismic December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

When extracting mixed phase wavelets, the length of the wavelet is

twice the Length of Wavelet value to create a time-symmetrical
wavelet. Zeros are padded up to time zero.

Seismic Troubleshooting

Gather data error message

The error message “Error: Trace numbers must increase by 1.
(gathers?)” means that you have more than one trace per CDP. This
could indicate that you have gathers data. If you are certain that this is
not the case, you can correct the problem using the segynum utility
located in the $OWHOME/SynTool/bin directory.

The error message “SynTool cannot handle seismic data with CDP
increments other than 1,” is also corrected using the segynum utility to
renumber CDPs. To run segynum, type segynum in an xterm
window, and follow the directions.

Viewing Depth Migrated Seismic in SynTool

Although there is no way to indicate to SynTool that SEG Y data is in
depth, you can set up a time-depth relationship that makes the data
display quite well.

1. From the Startup dialog box, select Constant Velocity for your
Depth-Time Source. You are prompted to enter a constant velocity
or ITT for the time-to-depth source.

2. Type: 2000 <desired depth units>/s

3. Select your RC Sonic and RC Density and fill in any other

parameters. Click on OK.

4. Once the session has started, select Datum Info from the
Time/Depth Scale popup menu.

5. In the (P) Velocity text field, key in 2000.

You now have a time-depth relationship where:

1 ms = 1 <depth unit> (m, ft)

December 2003 Workflows: Extracting Seismic 106

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Working with Database Synthetics

Database Synthetics are any synthetic loaded to the OpenWorks

database. You can load synthetics to the database that are generated in
SynTool or from another source.

Database synthetics are displayed either as a pane or an overlay. When

used as an overlay on a seismic pane, the database synthetic can be
correlated with the seismic data.

Uses for database synthetics

Database synthetic have the following uses:

• determine synthetic origin or compare with current synthetic. FOr

example, you have existing synthetics for the current well but have
no idea where they came from. You can display the database
synthetic and compare it to the SynTool generated synthetic.

• run a quality check on several synthetics during a session. For

example, you can create and save many synthetics and display
them to see how they compare to the original synthetic.

Tip: Save the original synthetic or reselect the original input curves
that generated the synthetic.

• correlate database synthetic to original seismic. For example, you

can save a synthetic to the database, run a correlation on it, and
compare it to the original seismic data.

Database Synthetics Saved in Depth

Synthetics can be saved to the database in depth. Synthetics saved in depth

are displayed as a curve. The Database Synthetic option will not display
synthetics saved in depth. For synthetics saved in depth, use the Panes ➛
New Database Log option.

Database Synthetics use the currently active TD table.

A database synthetic uses the current TD table not the one used when the
synthetic was saved.

107 Workflows: Working with Database Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Inserting an database synthetic as an overlay

Database synthetics can be inserted as an overlay on any of the
following panes:

• Seismic (Select Add Overlay ➛ Database Synthetic and enter a

trace number)

• Synthetic (Select Database Synthetic from the Empty Scale

menu and select a synthetic)

• Curve (Select Database Synthetic from the Empty Scale menu

and select a synthetic)

The database synthetic appears as an overlay. For more information,

see Synthetics or Working with Curves.

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Database Synthetics 108

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Synthetic Correlation Options

SynTool’s cross-correlation function allows you to mathematically

determine the “closeness of fit” between a synthetic and one or more
traces from your seismic data. Synthetic Correlation also helps
determine bulk time shift problems and phase discrepancies. You can
also use a synthetic correlation pane for editing logs or applying filters
to see how they affect the synthetic.

SynTool compiles the correlation results by

• resampling the synthetic to match sampling interval of seismic

• normalizing the synthetic data values to 1.0
• normalizing the selected seismic trace data
• cross correlating the synthetic data with seismic data
• adding the correlation product for each trace
• computing the envelope of the crosscorrelation trace
• finding the peak of the envelope, which estimates the time lag
• computing the instantaneous phase of the envelope at the peak
time, which estimates the phase shift
• computing the correlation coefficients between the seismic traces
and the raw synthetic, the time-shifted synthetic, and the time-
shifted, phase-rotated synthetic
• averaging the coefficient for all the selected traces
•
Anything that forces a recalculation of the correlation synthetic (such
as editing or changing any of the processing parameters or editing the
input sonic, density, or RCs) recomputes the correlation calculation.

Geological dip tends to smear the correlation results and should be

avoided by selecting a seismic trace and time range that minimizes dip.

You can insert a synthetic correlation panes from a seismic pane or an

overlay synthetic on a seismic pane.

Inserting a Synthetic Correlation Pane

To insert a synthetic correlation pane, select Synthetic Correlation
from the seismic scale or synthetic overlay popup menu.

109 Workflows: Synthetic Correlation Options December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Input parameters

Start/End Trace
Enter the start and end trace values to be correlated (usually 2-3 traces
on either side of the synthetic). The default trace range is the entire line
for seismic data.

Start/End Time
Enter the start and end times that you want to correlate. The Start time
must not be less than the actual synthetic start time plus the defined
Max correlation time, and the End time must not be greater than the
actual synthetic end times minus the defined Max correlation time.

Maximum correlation (lag) time

Lag times of +/- this value will be computed and displayed.

Example Correlation
The following example is a correlation pane inserted from a SEG-Y
seismic pane. The red trace shows the correlation trace; the green trace
shows its envelope.

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetic Correlation Options 110

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

optimum correlation
coefficient value for
selected polarity
convention

maximum correlation
time (as set from
Correlation Options
dialog box)

The CrCf values show three variants of the correlation coefficient

expressed as a percentage between synthetic and seismic.

• The first value CrCf:() gives the correlation coefficient at 0 lag

time.

• The second value CrCf (TS) gives the correlation coefficient at the
time lag where the correlation envelope is at its maximum.

• The third value CrCf (TS+PR) differs from the CrCf (TS) in that
the synthetic trace has been rotated by an amount equal to the
instantaneous phase of the envelope at the time lag of its
maximum. This last number represents the best achievable
correlation between the synthetic and seismic traces after
correcting for time and phase shifts.

• The CrCf values will range from 0 (no correlation between

synthetic and seismic) to 1 (a perfect match in normal polarity). A
CrCf value of 0.800 would be considered very good.

111 Workflows: Synthetic Correlation Options December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The ms readout shows the relative time lag of the synthetic with respect
to the seismic (within the selected correlation window defined in the
Max correlation time field). You can give the data a positive time shift
to move the synthetic down in time, or enter a negative time shift to
move the synthetic up in time thus achieving a zero lag time. For
example, if this value is -16 ms, you can enter a value of 16 in the
Absolute Shift text field in the Datum Info dialog box. This moves the
synthetic down in time and achieves a zero lag time.

The deg readout (also in first line at bottom of SynCor pane) shows the
relative phase shift of the synthetic with respect to the seismic. You can
give the synthetic’s filter a phase rotation to achieve a zero phase leg.
For example, if this value is -30 degrees, you can enter a value of 30 in
the phase shift field of the Wavelet Editor. This rotates the synthetic in
the positive direction, and achieves a zero phase shift.

Alternatively, you can reprocess the seismic data in PostStack or

Seismic Balance to achieve a time and phase match. Enter the ms and
deg as displayed, without a sign change, into the bulk shift and phase
rotation processes.

Achieving a zero lag time (ms value of 0) does not necessarily indicate
you have achieved the best possible correlation coefficient. It may
improve the correlation coefficient, but applying time varying filters
with varying degrees of phase rotation in addition to wavelet extraction
may also improve the correlation. However, you should obtain a zero
lag time (0 ms) before extracting a mix-phased wavelet.

If a time shift was entered into the Datum Info dialog box in order to
achieve a zero lag time, you can use the velocity computed by SynTool
derived as your current replacement velocity. Afterward, the time shift
fields in the Datum Info dialog box are returned to zero. This does not
affect the time shift applied to your synthetic or the ms/deg values.

Datum Info Dialog Box Computed Velocity Readouts

You should be suspicious of your checkshot data replacement velocity or

applied time shift, if the resulting replacement velocity is less than 5000 ft/s
or greater than 12,000 ft/s. If the computed velocity shows N/A at any time,
SynTool will not compute a replacement velocity (after you have applied a
time shift). This may have occurred because the data needed to calculate the
replacement velocity was at or above the time datum.

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetic Correlation Options 112

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Synthetics

Synthetics are created from the RC object. See Synthetic and Wavelet
Concepts for more information.

Synthetics are displayed either as a pane or an overlay. You select the

RC pane to use as input. If only one RC pane exists, it will
automatically be used and the synthetic automatically appears.
Synthetics have a trapezoidal (bandpass) filter applied.

Setting Synthetic and Database Synthetic View Parameters

When you select View Options from a synthetic or database synthetic a
dialog box appears. Depending on the type of synthetic display
selected, corresponding parameters becomes active.

Display
Toggle a display type from the following:

Vertical Synthetic/Database Synthetic

Display any combination of the following: Synthetic, Wavelet, or
Contribution plot.

Deviated Synthetic
This option is available only when this dialog box is called from the
synthetic, database synthetic, or synthetic overlay popup menu (you
can display deviated objects over seismic data only).

You must specify a seismic line’s Azimuth (from the north) if you are
overlaying on a SEG-Y pane.

Horizontal Scale
Define the horizontal scale for the object. If you selected Deviated
Synthetic, only the Label parameter is available.

Label
The top line of text used to annotate the scale area.

113 Workflows: Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Type
Select the horizontal scale type from the following choices:

• Unscaled centers the synthetic traces in the pane and evenly

spaces to fill the width of the scale.

• Scaled specify the traces per inch in the tr/in.

Select tr/in (tr/cm) traces per inch (centimeter)

Horizontal Scale Width

Select a scale width parameter.

Auto Width
This option is active for Horizontal Scale Type=Scaled. Adjusts the
width of a pane based on the traces per inch specified in tr/in.

User Width
Enter values in either inches or centimeters. Changing this value when
viewing a scaled display can cause clipping of traces.

Synthetic
These parameters are active when Synthetic is toggled on.

Style
Select Variable Area or Wiggle trace.

Color
Select the desired display color from a popup selection list.

The default color choices are FG and BG (variables ScreenForeClr=

and ScreenBackClr= in the .mirarc initialization file). Selecting BG can
cause the synthetic to blend in with the current screen background
color.

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetics 114

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Num Traces
Enter the number of duplicate traces to display. (The default can be set
using the NumSynTraces= variable in .mirarc initialization file).

Amp @ 1 trc
Enter the number of amplitude units to insert between traces. A trace of
this value has a deflection of exactly one trace.

Bias
You can enter a bias to center the data on zero.

Overlap %
Enter a percentage for the seismic display trace overlap. This parameter
changes the trace amplitude.

Wavelet
These parameters are active when Wavelet is toggled on.

Note: Wavelets displayed in depth are converted from the time domain
to depth using the velocities of the time-to-depth source curve.
Therefore, symmetric wavelets viewed in depth can appear asymmetric
and two wavelets of the same time length can appear to be different
lengths when viewed in depth.

Style
Select Wiggle or Variable Area.

Gain
Wavelet amplitudes are multiplied by this value before they are
displayed.

Zero Time Reference Line

Toggle on to draw a horizontal reference line showing the middle of the
wavelet. The midpoint (time reference = 0) is used as the convolution
reference time.

115 Workflows: Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Multi-Color
Toggle on to display multiple colors when displaying a synthetic with a
filter applied over multiple zones.

Contribution Plot
These parameters are active when Wavelet is toggled on.

A contribution plot is used for studying tuning effects. It can greatly

enhance your ability to understand the correlation between depth picks
and seismic data. Contribution plots show the reflection coefficients,
the individual wavelets that would result from the convolution of the
wavelet with each individual RC, and the synthetic traces that are the
result of summing the wavelets horizontally at a constant time.

Style
Select the style from either wiggle trace or variable area mode.

Gain
Enter a value to multiply to all samples of the RC series and wavelets
before they are displayed.

Number of Colors
You can enter the number of colors to use for contributing wavelets. For
example, to see contributing wavelets displayed in one color, enter 1.
For values greater than 1, wavelets are color coded to the RC series (for
example, a green RC corresponds to a green wavelet).

Note: Some colors do not plot or print well on some plotting/printing

devices. The first eight values in the color set tend to plot best. Reduce
the number of colors if some of your contributing wavelets are not
plotting well.

Wav Len (ms)

Enter the length of the wavelet to display in ms. The actual filter length
used to create the synthetic seismic trace is set in the TV Filter process
dialog box. Go to Edit Process ➛ TV Filter to set the actual filter
length.

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetics 116

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Sum TVF Wavelets

When you filter a synthetic with a time varying filter, two different
wavelets will contribute to the synthetic. Toggle this option on to see
the composite wavelet that was applied to the RC to create the synthetic
trace. If toggled off, the two contributing wavelets are drawn on top of
each other.

Num Traces
SynTool calculates the number of traces to display based on the current
time sample interval and the wavelet length. If you adjust either the
wavelet length or time sample interval, adjust the number of traces to
display.

Enter the number of traces to display. For example, to display all your
wavelets on top of each other, enter a 1.

Example synthetic
This example displays a synthetic and several synthetic traces

117 Workflows: Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

contributing resulting
RCs wavelets synthetic

zero time
reference
line

Color-coded
reflectors
correspond to the
peak or trough
across from it.

Each peak or trough associated with a reflector is

shown with its corresponding doublet.

Viewing SynTool Synthetics in SeisWorks

SynTool uses a time-depth curve to compare well tops in depth to
synthetics. For well events to line up properly in SeisWorks, convert
synthetics to depth:

1. Set the Time Datum (Datum Info menu) to the SeisWorks project
datum (SeisWorks main menu ➛ Defaults ➛ Project Datum).

2. Make the Syntool time sample interval (Calc Sample Interval)

less than or equal to (<=) the seismic data sample interval used by
SeisWorks.

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetics 118

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

3. Apply TVD corrections especially if you are working with a

deviated well. By default SeisWorks performs a TVD (true vertical
depth) correction.

4. Save the synthetic and the time-depth table to the database.

5. Select both the synthetic and time-depth table saved in SynTool in

the SeisWorks Seismic View window (Wells menu).

6. Redraw the SeisWorks display.

Changed amplitude values always appear the same in SeisWorks

No matter how high the amplitude values are in SynTool, they will
always be scaled back in SeisWorks to the maximum amplitude values
for that synthetic.

SeisWorks scales synthetics to fit the Track Width. Therefore, adjust

the Track Width in SeisWorks to get the look you want.

Comparing Edited Synthetics

You can insert several synthetics side by side and show the effects of
different edits you performed on the sonic and density curves.

1. Edit the sonic or density curve.

2. From the synthetic, select Save Synthetic ➛ to SEG-Y file.

3. Discard all edits from the sonic or density. The gray bars
disappear indicating that the curves are no longer edited.

4. Click on the New Seismic Pane icon and insert the synthetic trace
SEG-Y files you created.

Synthetic Troubleshooting

Synthetics Mistie Seismic

Although there are numerous reasons why a synthetic does not match
the seismic data, two of the most common are:

119 Workflows: Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Velocity problems: wrong TD function, bad or no checkshots,

sonic curve drift, datum problems, seismic processing problems,
etc.

• Structural problem: wrong geology. Sometimes, the well used

for synthetic calculations does not record the same geology as the
seismic line. This can happen if a well is on or off a 2D data line or
a bad migration of 3D data.

Correcting for Wells Off Line

Correcting for wells off of the seismic line can require stretching in
some depth intervals and squeezing in others to account for changes in
the geology between the well and seismic data.

SeisWorks provides a stretch/squeeze function which actually modifies

the time-depth table. However, this will not correct properly for
structure problems.

SynTool provides a depth stretch/squeeze thickness editor for structural

situations and a checkshots function for velocity problems. It also
provides static shifts, correction velocities, wavelet extractions, and
phase rotations.

Keep in mind that SeisWork’s stretch/squeeze function only modifies

the TD table. SynTool’s stretch/squeeze function modifies all of the log
curves in depth—not just the TD table.

Selecting the Right Solution

If all you are trying to do is tie a synthetic to seismic for hardcopy
purposes, it may not matter if you have a velocity or structural problem.
However, determining between the two is very important if you are
making a synthetic to:

• understand the physical rock properties at or away from the well

(such as matching structure or fluid properties by depth
stretch/squeeze operations or inserting a new log curve)

• perform wavelet extraction for wavelet processing

• create accurate TD tables for use in TDQ.

For example:

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetics 120

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

You want an accurate TD table at the well location. If you are working
with 2D data, or predicting away from the well, then by using
SynTool’s depth stretch/squeeze function, you are actually fabricating a
new well at a new x,y location.

The TD table that you generate, and the resulting pick depths, are
wrong for the well’s original x,y location.

Possible Workflow Solutions

Note that even if a well is exactly on a 2D line, you may still have a
structural problem because 2D seismic migration does not account for
out-of-the-plane reflections correctly. However, you may still want to
use the velocity correction approach because you do not want the picks
to move in depth.

Correcting for Velocity Problems

If you are tying a synthetic to properly migrated 3D data, and events do
not line up correctly, and you are confident it is a velocity problem, use
checkshots to stretch and/or squeeze the TD function.

Note: Do not use SynTool’s thickness editor in this workflow.

1. Apply checkshots and view the diagnostic panes (Panes ➛

Checkshot Diagnostics). Analyze the sonic log for obvious
problems such as cave-ins where it is reading mud velocities, cycle
skipping, etc. Then analyze the raw checkshot data for bad points.

Remember to toggle on Update Replacement Velocity when

working with checkshots. Keep in mind however, that you will need
to reapply any bulk shifts because SynTool will set all bulk shifts to
zero when you select Update Replacement Velocity.

2. Apply a bulk shift to line up the shallowest data. Think about

uphole surveys, seismic processing datum, weathering, elevation
corrections, residual statics, etc. to justify using a shift.

3. Extract a mixed or constant phase wavelet and apply the extracted

wavelet. Look at the cross correlation plot and redo the bulk shift if
necessary. Extract a new mixed phase wavelet if you change the
bulk shift because the wavelets will be different.

4. Overlay a synthetic on your seismic section and insert a correlation

pane to check the seismic/synthetic tie as you continue working.

121 Workflows: Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

This will allow you to see how your edits are affecting the
correlation through the cross-correlation coefficient (Xcor coeff)
and Max at values displayed in the correlation pane.

If you are using SeisWell to perform wavelet extraction, synthetics

are automatically overlain on the seismic section for each
extraction you make.

5. Manually alter checkshots or add new checkshot pairs to get a

good tie in the deeper section. From the Checkshot Process dialog
box, click on Edit Survey. Use the mouse readouts to build a
pseudo-checkshot survey.

• Point at a character point (such as a prominent peak) on the

synthetic and enter the depth as a checkshot depth.

• Point at the corresponding character on the seismic traces and

enter this time (make sure the checkshot datum and time datum
in SynTool are the same as the datum for the mouse readouts at
the bottom of SynTool’s main window).

• Repeat this two-step procedure, adding as many pseudo-

checkshot pairs as necessary to get a good tie throughout the
entire synthetic.

You will now have an exact match between the synthetic and
seismic data and your picks will line up properly in SeisWorks.

Correcting for Structural Problems

If you are confident the remaining mistie is due to a structural problem,
the following workflow should correct the structural problem:

1. Create a new well using the OpenWorks utilities and assign it to

the new x,y location where you are making the tie.

2. Copy the necessary curves, deviation survey, checkshots, and tops

to the new well.

3. Perform a bulk shift (Datum Info dialog box) to get the shallow
data to tie in SynTool.

4. Use Edit Data ➛ Thickness Edit to correct individual depth

intervals to their new thickness. If you need to remove or repeat a
geologic interval, use Edit Data ➛ Block Edit.

December 2003 Workflows: Synthetics 122

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

5. Generate a picks report (Picks ➛ Generate Report) showing the

adjusted pick depths.

6. Manually change the pick depths to their stretched/squeezed

position using the OpenWorks Surface/Fault Data Managerand

Now you have a “pseudo well” that contains a reasonable set of well
curves, a TD table, and picks all at the new well’s x,y location.

123 Workflows: Synthetics December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

TIme Depth Scale

The Time/Depth Scale menu is displayed from the Time/Depth pane.

Time/Depth Scale Menu

View Time
Toggle whether the data is displayed in time or depth. If Time has been
selected, a darkened or green checkbox indicates data is displayed in
time.

Scale Parameters
When Scale is accessed from the time-depth scale, the scale is changed
for all objects on display. Select Scale from the Time/Depth Scale
popup menu to open the scale dialog box.

Scale Type

Linear Unscaled
All data between the start and end time/ depth is displayed.

Linear, Scaled
Data is displayed at the start time/depth and at the specified scale
(inches/sec or cm/sec).

Zoom to Sonic Log’s Extent

Toggle on to display the entire length of the RC sonic curve.

Annotation

First value to annotate

Enter the time/depth value to reference all text annotations. Set to 0 to
take the first value of the curve.

December 2003 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale 124

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Annotation Increment
Enter the time/depth between text annotations and major grid lines.
Annotations increment from the First value by this value. Set to 0 to
determine a value that works well with the current scale height and font
size.

Minor grid increment

Enter the time/ depth between minor axis tick marks and minor grid
lines. Set to 0 to determine a value that works well with the current
scale height and font size.

Grids

Show major grid

Displays the vertical scale’s major grid lines in all object panes based
on the Annotation Increment.

Show minor grid

Displays the vertical scale’s minor grid lines in all object panes based
on the Minor grid increment.

Zoom to Sonic’s Extent

Displays the entire length of the RC Sonic curve in the application
window. Other curves, synthetics, and seismic data are also zoomed to
the sonic’s extent.

Gridding
Toggle grids on or off.

Scroll Limits Parameters

This option determines the range of data displayed by the scroll bar.

Minimum Scroll Depth

Enter the minimum depth to display at the top of the scroll bar.

125 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Maximum Scroll Depth

Enter the maximum depth to display at the bottom of the scroll bar.

Minimum Scroll Time

Enter the minimum time to display at the top of the scroll bar.

Maximum Scroll Time

Enter the maximum time to display at the bottom of the scroll bar.

Datum Info Parameters

Datum Info allows you to change the time datum, the replacement
velocity, and apply time shifts. SynTool also computes a velocity based
on your time shift. All datums are presented in the same units (feet or
meters) as the time-depth vertical scale. See Datums for additional
datum information.

Datum Elevations

Depth/Log Datum
Enter the elevation from which all log depths are referenced. The depth
datum cannot be changed in SynTool. The depth datum is set to the log
datum, stored for the current well in the OpenWorks database.

Time
Enter the time datum from which all log and synthetic times in the
current session are referenced. Elevations are considered positive above
mean sea level. This value is displayed at the top of the vertical scale.

If working with seismic data from a SeisWorks project, enter the

SeisWorks project datum (Path in SeisWorks: SeisWorks main menu ➛
Defaults ➛ Project Datum.)

This field is automatically updated to reflect the seismic time datum,

for each SEG-Y (.sgy) file or SeisWorks seismic section.

December 2003 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale 126

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Notify on datum change

Toggle on to be informed of attempts to change the current time datum.
For example, if the seismic project datum you are inserting differs from
your current time datum. This is simply a notification option. It can be
overridden at any time. To disable the option, enter the following
variable in the .mirarc file: ForceDatumDialog=0.

Checkshot
Enter the datum elevation for the current checkshot survey. The
checkshot datum is stored separately for each checkshot survey in the
OpenWorks database for the currently selected well. You can change
the checkshot survey datum by editing the checkshots applied to the
current time-to-depth source curve.

Editing the checkshot datum does not automatically change checkshot

times and depths. You should only edit the checkshot datum if you are
sure that it is incorrect as stored in OpenWorks.

First Layer

T-D Start Elev

Read-only field displaying the elevation of the start of the time-to-
depth curve. Time-Depth tables start at this elevation but reference the
time datum (Time text field).

Thickness
Read-only field displaying the thickness in depth (ft or meters) between
the time datum and the start of the time-to-depth curve. If the time
datum is below the start of the time-to-depth curve, this value is
reported as “N/A.”

(P) Velocity
Enter a new replacement velocity to shift all log curves in time by a
constant value if Time Datum is above the start of the time-to-depth
curve. If the Time Datum is below the start of the time-to-depth curve,
entering a new replacement velocity will not shift any log curves in
time. The defaults is 5000 ft/s. (P) Velocity, or replacement velocity,

127 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

defines the earth’s acoustic velocity above the start of the time-to-depth
curve.

Thickness
Read-only field displaying the thickness in two way time (ms) between
the time datum and the start of the time-to-depth curve. If the time
datum exists below the start of the time-to-depth curve, this value is
reported as “N/A.” As a result, SynTool will not post a computed
velocity for a time shift if any of the curve exists above time datum.

Time Shift

Absolute Shift
Enter a positive value to shift all objects down in time. Enter a negative
value to shift all objects up in time. Toggle onto apply the absolute time
shift (bulk shift). This field reflect the net shift after one or more
Relative Shifts have been applied.

Relative Shift
Shift Time and to Time are displayed in colors matching the horizontal
lines indicating the from and to shift points. You can do multiple
relative shifts.

Shift Time
Click on this field and then at the point in time you want to change. A
colored horizontal line is positioned at that point. For example, you can
select a particular peak on the synthetic seismic trace.

to Time
Click on this field and then on the desired destination point to shift the
time. A colored horizontal line is positioned at the destination point.
You can select a peak on a seismic section that corresponds with the
shift time on the synthetic trace.

December 2003 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale 128

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

The Relative Shift value is added to the existing Absolute Shift text
field value and a computed velocity is displayed.

Shifting Synthetics

Choosing to shift a synthetic by changing the first layer velocity

instead of supplying a time shift changes the TD table written to
OpenWorks and can have an effect on subsequent programs that use
the TD table from OpenWorks. SeisWorks honors both the time shift
and the first layer velocity. Other programs that use the TD table may
not acknowledge the time shift field.

These two fields are not automatically combined by SynTool. When

you apply a time shift, you are not changing the first layer velocity.
SynTool simply shifts the synthetic in time before displaying it.

Computed Velocity
Read-only field of the Computed Velocity. This is the effective
replacement velocity based on the current replacement velocity and
Absolute Shift or Relative Shift.

Apply Time Shift to (P) Velocity

When checkshots are applied, a replacement velocity is calculated by
the checkshot process and automatically entered into the (P) Velocity
text field only if Update Replacement Velocity in the Checkshot
Process dialog box is toggled on. If you then apply a time shift,
SynTool derives a computed velocity based on the time shift. You can
overwrite the checkshot derived replacement velocity in the (P)
Velocity text field with the computed velocity by clicking on Apply
Time Shift to (P) Velocity.

129 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Computed Velocity Readouts in the Datum Info Dialog Box

You should be suspicious of your checkshot derived replacement velocity, or

applied time shift, if the resulting replacement velocity is less than 5000 ft/s
or greater than 12,000 ft/s.

If the Computed Velocity read only field in the Datum Info dialog box
displays N/A at any time, SynTool will not compute a replacement velocity
(after you have applied a time shift). This will occur if

• The calculated replacement velocity is a negative number

• The time-to-depth source curve starts above the current time datum (i.e., the
first layer (P) velocity is not the velocity from the log start to the time datum;
it is the velocity above the log start which is already above the time datum).

If Relative Shift is toggled on, this option applies the time shift to all
displayed curves and synthetics by the amount displayed in the Shift
Time and to Time text fields. If Absolute Shift is toggled on, the time
shift entered is applied.

The Datum Info dialog box stays open when using Apply Time Shift
to (P) Velocity. Click on Undo to undo the last applied time shift.
Clicking on Undo in succession removes applied time shifts in the
reverse order they were applied (from last to first).

Time/Depth Report Parameters

You can create a report file anytime within a session, that shows the
current time-depth relationship controlled by the time-to-depth curve’s
velocities. Reports are generated with even time or even depth samples.
The format for the output file is defined by the ASCIITDFormat= and
ASCIITDFormat2= variables in the .mirarc initialization file.

The times and depths in the TD table match the checkshot times and
depths if checkshots are currently applied. However, the TD table will
not match checkshots when polynomial correction is used because of
the nature of polynomial corrections.

Report Type
Toggle on the report type:

December 2003 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale 130

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Even Depth Samples

Even Time Samples

Sample Interval
Enter a sample interval in milliseconds. The default sample interval is
the sample interval for the current session.

Start Depth
Enter a start depth. This appears when Even Depth Samples is toggled
on.

End Depth
Enter a end depth. This appears when Even Depth Samples is toggled
on.

You are also reminded that the report values reference time datum

Save Time/Depth Table parameters

You can save the current time-depth curve to the OpenWorks database.
to use by other Landmark programs in plotting well logs in time on top
of seismic data.

Existing Time-Depth Tables and Checkshots

SynTool will not overwrite the original time-depth table. The list of
existing time-depth tables is provided as a convenience so that you can
see what is currently in the database.

New Fields

Name
Enter a new name for the time-depth table.

131 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Read Only Fields

• Shift

• Datum

• Length

• Interpreter

Remarks
Enter any remarks to save with the table.

Active Seisworks Time Depth Table

Toggle on if this time-depth table is active in Seisworks.

Write 0,0 TD point

Toggle on to insert a 0,0 time-depth pair to save with the time-depth
table. If a 0,0 TD pair exists, SynTool ignores this option.

Sample Rate
Enter the output sample rate to save with the time-depth table.

Use Checkshots Only

Toggle on to save only the points from the checkshot table.

Calc Sample Interval Parameters

The sample interval is used to generate reflection coefficients and
convert log curves into the time domain. There is no minimum sample
interval. However, small sample intervals (for example, .1 ms) can take
a long time to compute.

Enter a sample interval in milliseconds

December 2003 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale 132

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Applying a Bulk Shift

You can apply a bulk shift to the data by entering an Absolute Shift
value in the Datum Info dialog box.

The relative position of the synthetic to the best fit with the seismic
(within the selected correlation window) is shown as ms at the bottom
of the Synthetic Correlation pane.

For example, a time shift of -66 ms indicates that the synthetic is 66 ms

above the best fit with the seismic. In this case, you enter a time shift of
66 ms to pull the synthetic down in time. Use a positive bulk shift
number to “lower” the synthetic in time. Use a negative number to
“raise” the synthetic in time.

133 Workflows: TIme Depth Scale December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Working with Curves

You can edit log curves, log curve overlays, RC curves, impedance
curves, or impedance curve overlays. Each menu is slightly different
depending on the selected curve. However, the procedure is basically
the same for each type of curve.

Show Database Log

This option allows you to select any depth domain curve from the
project database. The Show Database Log option can be chosen from
the Empty Scale popup menu.

Change Well allows you to select a new well from the project database.
You can then select a new curve from the curves in the list panel. If you
save the curve, it will be saved with the list of curves for the well you
selected at start-up. The curve is not moved to the well you chose at
start-up, it is only copied to that location.

Setting Curve View Menu

When you select View Options from a log, RC, or impedance curve
popup menu, the View Options dialog box appears. Depending on the
type of curve selected, corresponding parameters becomes active.

Scale Label
Specify any of the following scale label parameters:

Title
Enter a title to use to annotate the scale area. The default label is the
curve’s name.

Set Units Automatically

Toggle on to update the units automatically if the object’s units change.

Units

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 134

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

When Set Units Automatically is toggled off, enter the text to display in
the curve’s scale area.

Scale Type
Specify any of the following scale type parameters.

Type
The object’s scale area is displayed in one of three ways:

• Linear displays the scale area linearly between the left and right
scale values.

• Linear - Scaled displays the scale area based on the values

specified in the units/in or units/cm text field.

• Logarithmic displays the scale area logarithmically between the

left and right scale values.

Scale Width
Display the scale width of the current curve. You can change this by
entering an exact width of the scale. Changing this value when viewing
a scaled display can cause some clipping of the curve.

Scale Width Notes

The scale width cannot be set when a pane is maximized to fill the
application window.

This option is useful if you are trying to produce hardcopy to overlay

directly on top of another paper log display.

Changing the size of the seismic pane using this procedure will not
have any affect on the scale area for overlays.

units/in (units/cm)
Displays the current units per inch for the currently selected object.
When Type is Linear - Scaled, you can change the units per in/cm.

135 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Scale Extents
The following scale extent parameters define the scale:

Automatic
Toggle on to automatically set the left and right scale values so that all
curve amplitudes fit within the scale area.

Left
Enter a value to change the left scale value.

Right
Enter a value to change the right scale value.

Reverse
Toggle to reverse the left and right scale values.

Display

Style
Select one of the following curve styles. Deviated Line is only
available from a log curve overlay displayed on a seismic section.

• Line to display a log curve by connecting adjacent curve values

with a continuous line.

• Spike to show each individual log sample as a horizontal line that

extends from 0 to the log’s amplitude value.

• Fill to view a log in a solid color. The color is applied between the
log’s amplitude values and the specified Baseline Coordinate.

The Baseline field specifies the horizontal scale value to start the
fill. Toggle Low on to fill the color from the baseline coordinate to
smaller values. Toggle High on to fill the color from the baseline
coordinate to larger values.

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 136

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• Deviated Line (overlays only) displays a deviated curve by

connecting adjacent curve values with a continuous deviated line.
When selected, Show Curve as Deviated is enabled. See Deviated
Displays for more information.

Color
The default color choices are FG and BG (variables ScreenForeClr=
and ScreenBackClr=). BG colors can cause blending with the current
screen background color.

Changing Curve Color in SynTool

All displayed curves appear in the color for that type of curve as listed
in the OpenWorks Curve Dictionary. Changing the color in SynTool
only applies for the session. To change the color permanently, you
must edit the color in the OpenWorks Curve Dictionary.

Line Style
The line style refers to the style of line used to draw the object. Only
one item may be selected from the popup selection list shown at left.

Using different line styles may improve the legibility of hardcopy

output when produced on a monochrome device.

Line Width
The width of the line for the currently displayed object. Double-click
on the value in the text field or use the stepper arrows to increase or
decrease the width of the line.

Overlay
Specify any of the following overlay parameters. This option is enabled
only for objects displayed on a seismic section.

Show Curve as Deviated

This option is automatically toggled on when you select Deviated Line
from the Display Style panel.

137 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

By default, SynTool displays all objects as deviated if deviated

information exists in the database for that object.

If necessary, enter the seismic line’s azimuth from low to high CDP in
the Seismic Azimuth text field.

Blank Background
This option is used to blank out an area under the object being
displayed and is only available for objects displayed on top of seismic
data.

Toggle on and enter a value in inches or centimeters in the text field if

you want to change the blanking width for the overlay. Toggle this
option off if you do not want to blank out the area beneath the overlay.
This option is only available for objects displayed on top of seismic
data.

The Blank Background feature works by drawing the log curve or

synthetic with a wide black “pen” (thus, “blanking” out an area of the
seismic section). The actual log curve is drawn over this area. The
width of the pen is what you specify in the Blanking field.

Because the blanking is performed by first drawing with a black pen,

this technique may not work with vector output devices such as pen
plotters.

Annotation Options
Specify any of the following annotation parameters:

Automatic
When toggled on, SynTool will automatically adjust the First Value to
Annotate as well as the Major and Minor Grid Increment.

First Value to annotate

Specifies the log amplitude value from which all text annotations will
be referenced. If this value is set to 0, SynTool will determine a value
automatically.

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 138

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Major Grid Increment

Sets the increment between text annotations and major grid lines.
Annotations increment from the First Value to Annotate. If this value is
set to 0, SynTool will determine a value that works well with the
current scale width and font size.

Minor Grid Increment

Sets the increment between minor axis tick marks and minor grid lines.
If this value is set to 0, SynTool will determine a value that works well
with the current scale width and font size.

Show Grid
When checked, displays vertical grid lines on the selected object pane
based on the Major or Minor Grid Increment. Vertical grid lines may be
turned off individually for each object. This option is not available for
deviated objects displayed on top of a seismic section.

Editing Curves
All log editing occurs on the depth sampled log. Log edits are
performed on the data after the object’s processes are applied.

Edited curves can be saved to the current project database with the Save
to Database.

Select one of the four editing methods from the Edit Data option:

• Table edit is used to edit each depth sample of a log individually.

This can be useful when removing spikes from the log or other
irregularities like sonic cycle skipping.

• Block Edit provides several different methods for modifying a

log’s amplitude values in a specific depth interval. All log edits
must be performed on depth sampled data. If you are currently
viewing the curve in time and you select Block Edit, SynTool will
prompt you to change the vertical scale to depth. If you click on
Cancel, SynTool aborts the Block Edit request.

• Thickness Edit stretches, squeezes, and deletes a depth range

from all log curves. You can apply several thickness edits with this
option.

139 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Mouse Edit uses the mouse to “sketch” in new curve values on top
of an existing curve.

Table Edit
Select Edit Data ➛ Table Edit to open the Curve Editor dialog box.

You can change the fields in the table as with any other spreadsheet
editor. Once you have made all changes, click OK. For information
on using a table editor, see Table Editor.

Block Edit
Edited curves can be saved to the current project database with the Save
to Database option.

Start Depth and End Depth

This defines an interval range to edit.

The Int. Average read-only field is adjusted based on the new

Start/End Depth values. This field shows the curve’s average amplitude
value over the currently selected depth range. It is displayed as a dashed
vertical line on top of the curve you are editing.

Adjustment

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 140

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Select one of the following adjustment edits:

• New Avg computes and applies a constant shift to all log

amplitudes.

• Multiplier applies the specified constant multiplier to all log

amplitudes.

• Shift adds the specified constant value to each log amplitude.

• Constant sets all log values to the specified constant.

• Paste replaces the log curve beneath the Start Depth with a curve
segment that is copied using Copy. The length of the copied log
curve is indicated as a vertical green line along the left edge of the
log display.

• Interpolate linearly interpolates the log’s amplitude values

between the Start Depth and End Depth.

Note: You cannot make the curve longer than its original length using
Paste. However, you can follow this two-step process:

1. Use the Thickness Editor to stretch the zone to be replaced.

2. Use the Block Editor’s Paste option to insert the new curve
segment in the stretched zone.

Block edit menu buttons

• Copy the currently selected log range. Copied curve segments can
be pasted over the displayed curve(s) using the Paste option. Copy
and paste can be used to copy segments within a single curve or
between different curves.

• Apply the change you have requested to the log curve. The dialog
box remains open.

• Close the dialog box and clear the undo buffer.

• Zoom/Unzoom the current range of depths. Zoom redraws curves

to a new scale. Click on Unzoom to undo.

141 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Undo the curve changes since the last Apply. The Undo option
only removes edits that you make to a curve during the time the
Block Edit dialog box is open.

Thickness Edit
You are prompted to change the vertical scale to depth if you are in
time.

Scope of Thickness Edits

Thickness edits are applied to all log curves loaded into SynTool including
log curves that are in currently hidden panes.

Start Depth and End Depth

This defines an interval range to edit. Select an interval range to edit by
entering a value in the Start Depth and End Depth fields.

Adjustment
• Remove Section deletes all data in the selected range. Data
below the range is moved up, thus changing the total length of
the curve.

• Stretch/Squeeze, Depth Method. Log amplitude at the End

Range is moved to the New End. Data below the End Range is
moved up or down, depending on the New End. This option
changes the total length of the curve.

• Replace Above deletes data between the Start Range and New
Start. Then data between the Start Range and End Range is
stretched upward to fill in the interval between the New Start
and End Range. This option does not affect any data below the
End Range or the total length of the log curve.

New Start must be between log data start and the Start value.

• Replace Below deletes First, data between the End Range and
New End is deleted. Then data between the Start Range and
End Range is stretched downward to fill in the interval between
the Start Range and New End. This option does not affect any
data below the New End depth or the total length of the log

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 142

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

curve. The New End value must describe a depth between the
End Range and the actual end of the log curve.

The New End must be between the log curve end and the End
value.

Thickness Edit menu buttons

• Apply thickness edits to all log curves loaded to SynTool
during the current session (including hidden curves). If you
want to keep thickness edited logs for future reference they
should be saved to the project database using Save Curve ➛ to
Database.

• Close the Thickness Editor dialog box without applying

additional log edits.

Applying stretch to pick labels

Thickness edits also affect the positioning of pick labels. After
thickness edits are applied, you are prompted to select Yes to apply
thickness edits to pick labels.

Applying Thickness Edits to Pick Labels and Top Depths

Although thickness edits can be made to pick labels, these changes

cannot be saved. The edits applied to labels will affect what is
displayed on the screen only.

To change pick labels or top depths, and have them show up in SynTool
and other OpenWorks applications, you must use the OpenWorks
utility Surface/Fault Data Manager or change the picks and labels in
SeisWorks. If SynTool is open during the editing process, you need to
save your session, select File ➛ Close, then reopen your session to see
the effect of your edits.

Mouse Edit
Select Edit Data ➛ Mouse Edit. The mouse cursor changes shape

Sketch method

143 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Point-by-point select points with each mouse button click. The

new curve section is drawn with each mouse click.

• Continuous sketch draws a continuous curve line by holding

down MB1.

Delete newly entered segments by pressing Button 1 anywhere within

the currently edited segment. All points from this location to the end of
the segment will be returned to the values they held prior to the most
recent edit.

3. When you have made the desired edits, press Button 3

Mouse Edit menu buttons

• Apply Accepts all points entered in the current segment edit
session. After using Apply, you may move to a different depth
on the curve and continue editing.

• Undo Restores all edited points to the values they held before
the most recent Apply. Successive applications of Undo restore
earlier edits from the editing session until the buffer is cleared.

• Close Exits the Mouse Edit mode. If points have been entered
but not yet applied when you select Close, you will be
prompted to Apply or Discard the most recently edited points.
You can also choose to cancel the Close procedure and return to
Mouse Edit mode. Continue to make edits on this curve or
select the Close option from the Mouse Edit popup menu to exit
the Mouse Edit mode.

• Zoom/Unzoom These options work in the same manner as the

Zoom and Unzoom icons. Zoom allows you to change the range
of depths currently displayed in the window.

Saving an Edited Curve

Select Save Curve or Save Synthetic ➛ to open the Save dialog boxes
for the following options.

To Database (Curve)
When you select To Database, the Curve Save dialog box appears. You
can either Replace Wavelet or create a New Wavelet. Replace Curve

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 144

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

is not available for derived curves such as Gardner densities and

synthetics saved in depth or curves with a Run:C or Vers:2 designation.

When you select a New Curve, you must supply curve information
such as, Log Tool Name and API Code. These fields in the Save
Curve dialog box are read only:

• Version
• Storage Units
• TVD Corrected
• Start/End/Interval
• Length
• Interpreter

To Database (Synthetics)
Synthetics and time-depth tables cannot be deleted in SynTool. Delete
them in OpenWorks using the Well Data Manager or in SeisWorks
from the Seismic View Wells ➛ Select menu.

You can either Replace Synthetic or create a New Synthetic. Toggle

on SeisWorks Active Synthetic to set the synthetic to the active
synthetic in SeisWorks.

When you select a New Synthetic, you must supply requested

information. These fields are read only.

• Interpreter
• Start time
• End time
• Sample interval
• Length (points)

To Database in Depth (Synthetics, RC, Impedance)

You can save synthetics, RC curves, and impedance logs sampled
evenly in depth with this option. Some program such as StratWorks or
PetroWorks uses curves sampled in depth. Viewing synthetics saved in
depth in SeisWorks allows you to simultaneously view a synthetic and
another log curve.

145 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

You can either Replace Curve or create a New Curve. However, the
Replace Curve option is not available when saving a synthetic in depth.

Naming the Synthetic

It is practical to use the default name for synthetics, impedance curves,

and RC series saved to the database in depth. Entries are placed in the
Curve Dictionary for the default names, saving the colors and setting
the units and ranges to appropriate values.

When you select a New Curve, you must supply curve information
such as, Log Tool Name and API Code. These fields in the Save
Curve dialog box are read only:

• Version
• Storage Units
• TVD Corrected
• Start/End/Interval
• Length
• Interpreter

Sample Interval

The sample interval for synthetics saved in depth will equal the Depth
sample interval in the current SynTool session.

To ASCII File
This option saves the curve or synthetic to an ASCII file. (Defined by
the ASCIISynFormat= and ASCIISynFormat2= variables)

Depth domain objects can be saved in depth or time. Time domain

objects such as impedance logs, RCs, or synthetics can be saved only in
time. If saving more than one curve or synthetic to the same ASCII file,
a prompt appears.

Select Yes to save to the same ASCII file. Select No to name a new file.
To help you identify the ASCII file later, append a .txt extension to the
filename. Click Cancel to cancel the save request.

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 146

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Time, Depth, Amp to ASCII File (Synthetics Only)

A .mirac variable is required if you want to write synthetics to an
ASCII file for use by nonLandmark applications.

Select Yes to save to the same ASCII file. Select No to name a new file.
To help you identify the ASCII file later, append a .txt extension to the
filename. Click Cancel to cancel the save request.

To read the contents of the ASCII file:

1. Select File ➛ OS Window, then type: cd <path to file>.

2. Type: more <filename> to see the contents of the file.

To SEGY File (Synthetics Only)

Save synthetic seismic traces to a 32-bit floating point SEGY file. The
synthetic can be imported into a SeisWorks/2D project and used as a
reference point for SeisWorks Seismic Balance.

Enter the number of traces, the starting CDP number, and a name for
the SEGY file. A .sgy extension is automatically appended to the
filename.

Discard Edits
This option discards all edits made to all curves. It only discards edits
on the copy of each log stored in the computer’s memory; it does not
affect curves already stored in the project database.

Click on This Curve or All Curves to discard edits from the current
curve or all curves in the display. Note: Thickness edits cannot be
discarded from a single object.

Scale Location
The Scale Location option can be chosen from the popup menus in the
scale area of any seismic overlay, including the synthetic overlay,
database synthetic overlay, log curve overlay, RC curve overlay,
impedance curve overlay and pick labels overlay. This features lets you
change the CDP location of the overlaid curve.

To specify the CDP scale location of an overlay on a seismic section

147 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

1. Select Scale Location from the overlay’s scale area popup menu
to open the following dialog box.

2. Enter the trace number where you want the center of the overlay’s
scale area to appear, then click on OK.

Combining Two Log Runs of the Same Curve

To combine two log runs of a particular curve:

1. Load both log runs into the same well in the database. Use the data
loading utilities described in the OpenWorks Geodataloading
manual.

2. Pad the depth range in the Startup dialog box to whatever start and
end depths are necessary to include the combined depth range of
the two curves.

3. Display both curves in SynTool and select Edit Data ➛ Block

Edit from the scale area popup menu of one of the curves.

• Enter the Start/End Depths of the range you want to copy from
the currently active curve.

• Click on Copy, then click on Close.

4. Select Edit Data ➛ Block Edit from the second curve’s scale area
popup menu.

• Enter the Start/End Depth range to which you want to paste

the copied portion, then toggle on the Paste radio button.

• Click on Apply to see the results of the edit, then click on

Close.

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 148

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

5. (The RC log appears as an overlay. It also has its own popup menu
(accessible from the scale area) that is identical to any other
impedance log popup menu.

Highlighting curves

Highlight Family
Highlights all the panes which share a family.

Highlight Object and Ancestors

Highlights the selected pane and all the panes which were used as input
to that object. For example, if you select Highlight Object and
Ancestors from an Impedance pane, the Sonic and Density objects
which used the Impedance object as input are highlighted.

Highlight Object and Descendants

Highlights the selected pane and all which used the object in the
selected panes as input. For example, if you select Highlight Object
and Descendants from an Impedance pane, the RC and Synthetics
which used that Impedance object as input would be highlighted.

Clear Highlights
Removes all highlighting from the display.

Change Input Curves Parameters

You can select a new P-Wave sonic, Shear sonic, or RC density or any
auxiliary curve from either the current well or any other well within the
current project without exiting your SynTool session. This option cis
available from a log curve or log curve overlay popup menu. However,
it is not available on curve popup menus where the RC Sonic and RC
Density are generated as an output of another object. For example,
selecting the time-to-depth source at start-up using RC Sonic Indirectly,
a Gardner density, or Inverse-Gardner sonic.

149 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Avoiding Truncated Input Curves

The Depth Range entered in the Startup dialog box will not change when
you select a new input curve. If your new curve is deeper than your original
depth range, the end depths are truncated.

To avoid truncation, close SynTool and restart with File ➛ New. Set the
User Depth Range option to be deep enough to display the full depth range
of your curve.

1. Select Change Input Curve from a curve’s scale area popup

menu to open the following dialog box.

Change Well
Select a new input curve from the list l. After saving your session, these
curves are available from the list of curves for the well selected at
startup.

Select Log Units

If the Working Units field is blank, SynTool is not able to convert the
units based on the current session units for that curve type. The Select
Log Units dialog box will appear.

December 2003 Workflows: Working with Curves 150

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Copying and Pasting From Curves in Other Wells

Using the Change Input Curve option, you can open another well in
the project (or select Panes ➛ New Database Log and change the
well), select and display a new curve, edit the curve and/or copy and
paste from it to other curves on the display using the Block Edit
function.

Defining Replacement Velocity with a Linear Function or TD values

Replacement velocity is used in time-to-depth conversion. It gives a
time value to the interval between the KB and the start of the log. The
default is 5000 ft/sec.To define the replacement velocity with a linear
function or checkshot values, you must pad the sonic from the start of
the log to the time datum.

In the Startup dialog box, pad the Depth Range to the time datum.
Select Edit Data ➛ Block Edit from time/depth source. If you chose
RC Sonic Indirectly for the time-to-depth source at start-up, edit the
master sonic. You will see the changes in the copy of the master sonic
you are using as your time-to-depth source.

1. Enter an End Depth of one foot (or one curve increment) deeper
than the Start Depth.

2. Toggle on Constant and set the constant velocity value that you
want at the start of the interval, then click on Apply.

3. Select the beginning of the real data as the End Depth and set the
Start Depth to be one foot (or one curve increment) above the
End Depth. Set the desired Constant velocity for the end of the
padded interval, then click on Apply.

4. Set the Start Depth to the beginning of the padded section and
End Depth to the end of the padded section, then toggle on
Interpolate. Click on Apply.

The Block Editor draws a line representing interpolated velocities from

the selected Start Depth to End Depth.

If you have applied a time shift and want to apply checkshots for the
first time, SynTool does not update the replacement velocity. If you
want to update the replacement velocity, toggle on Update
Replacement Velocity in the Checkshot Process dialog box and
reapply checkshots.

151 Workflows: Working with Curves December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Processes

Each SynTool object contains a set of predefined processes that are

applied to the data before it is viewed on screen. Data is read from the
project database (or from the output of another object, if it is a derived
object such as an RC) and passed through each process. If the process
is applied, the data is changed before it enters the next process. If the
process is not applied the data is not changed.

All processing occurs in the native domain (time or depth) of an object.

• Edit Process List

• Checkshots

• AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Process

• TV (Time Variant) Filter Process

• Multiplier Process

• Median Filter Process

• RC (Reflection Coefficient) Process

• Change Polarity Process

• Impedance Process

• TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process

• User Defined Transform Process

• Unit Conversion

• Range Enforcement Process

• Rotation Process

• Time Shift Process

December 2003 - 152

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Edit Process List

Select Edit Process List from an object’s scale area popup menu to
open the Edit Process List dialog box.

Shortcut: Displaying the Edit Process Dialog Box

You can double-click on the log curve, synthetic or RC object’s scale area to
display the object’s Edit Process List dialog box.

Not all objects have the same processes available. Processes available
for a particular object are found in the object’s process list.

All editing of a log object occurs after all processes have been applied.
Therefore, it is impossible to change process parameters on an edited
curve without discarding the edits.

If you have edited a curve and later want to change the process that was
applied, you must first save the curve to the database and then bring it
back in to SynTool to either edit it further and/or perform further
processing. Keep in mind however, that you should turn off any
processes that you do not want SynTool to reapply. (SynTool informs
you if TVD correction have been applied and does not apply it again.)

The order processes are listed in the Edit Process List dialog box is the
order in which the processes are applied to the selected object. If the
process is applied, the data is changed before it enters the next process.
If the process is not applied the data is not changed.

Some objects display numerical processes that SynTool has applied to

the data. If you select one of the numerical process, you are informed
that it has no editable parameters. By looking at a process list for any
object, you can quickly view the modification that was made to the data
to arrive at what you are seeing on screen.

153 Processes: Edit Process List December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The following table shows the available processes, where they can be
applied from, and what they affect.

Process Applied From... Affects...

Checkshots time-to-depth curve only all objects

TVD Correction any log curve object all objects

Generalized • master designated objects • all objects derived from them (if from the
Transform master sonic, then all objects)
• other log curve object
• that object only

RC RCs (reflection coefficient series) all synthetics

Change Polarity synthetics synthetic only

Impedance impedance impedance plus RC and synthetics derived from

it

Multiplier • RCs • all synthetics

• synthetic • synthetics

TV (time variant) • synthetic • synthetics

Filters • database synthetic
• impedance curve

AGC (Automatic • synthetic • synthetics

Gain Control)

Median Filter (2) • master designated objects • all objects derived from them (if from the
(a second median master sonic, then all objects)
filter is available) • other log curve objects • that object only

Range Enforcement time-to-depth curve only all objects

Rotation database synthetic

Time Shift database synthetic

December 2003 Processes: Edit Process List 154

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Checkshots

Checkshot surveys are frequently performed on a well. They measure

the amount of time necessary for an acoustic energy pulse to travel
from the earth’s surface to a particular downhole depth. Checkshots
often provide a very good correlation between log depth and seismic
arrival time. They are used to provide time-to-depth conversions and to
calibrate the integration of a continuous velocity or sonic log.

Using the values in a sonic log for time-to-depth conversions does not
always work well. The sonic recording system or down hole conditions
can cause unreliable sonic log values. In this situation you may want to
perform an automatic adjustment of the sonic log’s values based on the
checkshot survey. However, it is recommended that you manually edit
the sonic log first to correct any known depth zones that have problems.

TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction and Applying Checkshots

Most checkshot surveys are designed, recorded, and processed to record

vertical travel times. For this reason, the sonic curve depths should almost
always be true-vertical-depth corrected before you apply the checkshot
correction.

If you are uncertain how the checkshot survey was prepared, and whether the
depths and times are truly vertical, please consult with the original checkshot
report provided by your contractor.

If you have ASCII checkshot files, you can load them to the
OpenWorks database using the data loader utility.

SynTool does not use TD curves for time-to-depth conversion. Time-to-

depth calculations use the velocities in the time-to-depth curve selected
in the Startup dialog box. The only way to make SynTool honor a
particular TD curve is to import it and apply it as checkshots to the
curve selected as the time-to-depth curve. See RC Sonic Directly vs RC
Sonic Indirectly for more information.

SynTool Checkshot Prep

Before applying checkshots, SynTool does the following:

Validates the checkshot data

155 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

You are warned with an error message if checkshot data is not

consistent. That is, Times and depths do not both increase or there are
not at least two checkshots occurring within the body of the sonic log.

If you are applying a polynomial checkshot correction and the

polynomial order is greater than one less than the number of checkshots
that occur within the body of the sonic.

Preconditions the checkshots

SynTool performs the following preconditioning:

• Discards checkshots that occur before the master sonic’s start

depth and after its end depth.

• Takes the first checkshot below top of sonic and calculates

Correction Velocity.

• Fabricates checkshot at the top of Sonic such that Sonic log above
the first checkshot is corrected to the Correction Velocity
calculated by the 0,0 time-depth pair and the first checkshot.

• Fabricates checkshot at end of the sonic log if one does not exist.

• Clip any values outside the minimum and maximum values

specified in the Sonic Clippings dialog box.

• Datum-corrects the checkshots to the master sonic log’s datum

(well datum).

Checkshot correction is performed

For multiple methods, the checkshots are preconditioned between the
application of each checkshot type.

Amplitudes are clipped

Amplitudes are clipped to the minimum and maximum value after
checkshot correction has been applied.

Applying checkshots
Checkshot corrections are applied only from the Time-Depth Source
selected at start-up. Applying checkshot corrections affects all objects

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 156

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

because the time-to-depth source controls the time-depth relation of all

log curves and synthetic sections. To change your time-to-depth source
selection, you must start a new session.

If you have selected RC Sonic Directly at start-up as your time-to-depth

source, checkshots are applied directly to the RC Sonic.

You can choose to apply checkshots going into a session or not. Once
in the session, checkshots can be turned on or off, reapplied once they
are turned off. The checkshot method used in applying the checkshots
can also be changed during the session.

Selecting Checkshot Surveys and Time-Depth Tables

A time-depth table with too fine a sample interval will not give satisfactory
results within the SynTool application. SynTool warns you if the survey you
select has more points than SynTool considers reasonable for a checkshot
survey. You will be allowed to reselect another time-depth table. If creating
a time-depth table to use in SeisWorks it is recommended to using the
seismic sample rate.

The Shift readout in the read-only section of the dialog box applies only to
time-depth tables. If the shift displays anything other than 0, it is not a
checkshot survey.

If a time shift is found in the time-depth table you want to use as a checkshot
survey, SynTool will inform you as to how much of a shift was discovered.
SynTool will either allow you to apply the time shift to the checkshot time
values or ignore the shift when making checkshot corrections. You can also
make another selection.

Editing checkshots
Checkshot data can be edited using several methods:

Manual Checkshot Editing

Use the table editor from Edit Process List ➛Checkshots.

Graphical Checkshot Editing

Use a graphical editing tool from Panes ➛Checkshot Diagnostics.

157 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Synthetic Stretch/Squeeze, Time method

This is a capability from the Graphical Checkshot Editing. While
making edits to a checkshot, a pair of horizontal lines show the
“before” and “after” positions on the Z-axis of the cursor location. By
overlaying a synthetic seismogram on a seismic section, an event on the
synthetic can be stretched to match an event on the seismic.

While this technique is slightly less direct than the similar operation in
SeisWorks, it has two distinct advantages:

• The input acoustic model is immediately updated as a result of the

stretch squeeze operation, resulting in consistent reflectivity
calculations and velocity calibrations prior to wavelet extraction
and synthetic generation.

• You can instantly see what kind of interval velocity changes are
being introduced as a result of the stretch/squeeze operation.

See Stretch/Squeeze, Depth Method for more information.

Checkshot Process Parameters

The checkshot process allows you to apply checkshot corrections to the
Time-Depth curve. You can select a correction method and clipping
bounds. You can edit the current checkshot survey or select a new one.
You can also generate reports.

Select Edit Process List ➛Checkshots process to open the

Checkshots Process dialog box.

Select Desired Pane Type

See Checkshot methods in getting started

Checkshot Surveys
The CheckShot Process dialog box displays the following information
about the current survey.

• Active displays the name of the current checkshot survey.

• Number T,D pairs defined displays the number of current time-

depth pairs defined for the selected checkshot survey.

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 158

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Select New Active Survey

Selects a new checkshot survey or time-depth table from any well
within the current project. The Select New Active Survey dialog box
becomes active.

Edit Times as Two Way

Toggle on to display all times in the Checkshot Table Editor as two-
way travel times. Toggle off to display checkshot times as one-way
travel times.

Freeze Interval Velocities

Toggle on to freeze the velocities in the checkshot diagnostic panes.
Edits in time or depth values effect changes in their corresponding
depth or time values while holding interval velocity constant.

Propagate Edits Downward

Toggle on so that movement of any kneepoint will result in automatic
adjustment of all other kneepoints below it on the time-depth scale.

Edit Active Survey

Changes you have made in the Checkshot Process dialog box are
applied and the Table Editor appears.

Update Replacement Velocity

Toggle on to use the checkshot data to update the replacement velocity.
SynTool calculates the new replacement velocity from the actual
checkshot data.

The replacement velocity is not updated after the dialog box is closed.
To have the checkshot process update the replacement velocity again,
re-enter the Checkshot Process dialog box, toggle on the Update
Replacement Velocity option, and click on Apply.

159 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Replacement Velocity and Time Shifts

You should be suspicious of your checkshot derived replacement

velocity if it is less than 5000 ft/s (approximately 1500 m/s) or greater
than 12,000 ft/s (approximately 3600 m/s).

If the Computed Velocity read only field in the Datum Info dialog box
displays N/A at any time, SynTool will not compute a replacement
velocity (after you have applied a time shift). This will occur if

• The calculated replacement velocity is a negative number

• The time-to-depth source curve starts above the current time datum (i.e.,
the first layer (P) velocity is not the velocity from the log start to the time
datum; it is the velocity above the log start which is already above the
time datum).

Generate Checkshot Report

Toggle on to generate a report. Enter a name for the checkshot report in
the dialog that appears.The report appears in a window based on the
variable FileViewer= entry in the .mirarc initialization file.

Checkshot Table Editor

The Checkshot Data Table editor allows manual editing of checkshot
data values. The data display shows interval times, interval thicknesses,
and interval velocities. Edits can be made to these values rather than to
time and depth. It is also possible to force interval velocities to remain
constant, causing changes in the depth or thickness fields to update the
time fields rather than the velocity fields.

In addition, it is possible for an edited point to change either the

interval velocity of the layer immediately below the edited point, or to
propagate the change in time and depth values to all points below the
edited point, while holding interval velocities constant.

Checkshot Table Editor Display

The checkshot table editor displays all checkshot points as a row in the
table. The following data is provided for each checkshot point:

• Row # is a sequential number included for each row of data.

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 160

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• 2WT Sec is the measured two-way travel time for each checkshot
point in the survey.

• Depth ft. is the calculated depth for each checkshot point.

• Int 2WT/Thickness/Int Vel. is the two-way travel time, thickness,

and velocity of the interval between each checkshot point. These
values are derived from the 2WT Sec.

• Avg Vel/RMS Vel. is the average velocity and RMS velocity for
each checkshot point. These are cumulative values.

When you edit any value in the table, all related values are updated
automatically to maintain consistency. Your changes are propagated
downward through the rest of the table if Propagate Edits Downward
is on. For information on using a table editor, see Table Editor.

Do not enter checkshot times in milliseconds (ms).

Entering checkshot times in milliseconds (ms) will give incorrect

results. Checkshot times must be in seconds.

Editing Headers
In addition to editing the time-depth pairs, the Table Editor also allows
you to edit header information about the checkshots.

Depths and times in the checkshot survey reference the Checkshot

Datum elevation. Remarks are stored in the project database with the
checkshot table and printed in the checkshot report.

Editing Checkshot Datum

Editing the checkshot datum does not automatically change checkshot

times and depths. You should only edit the checkshot datum if you are
sure that it is incorrect as stored in OpenWorks.

Checkshot Diagnostic Parameters

Checkshot diagnostics
Checkshot diagnostics help you determine bad checkshot pairs or
incorrect checkshot locations. If the incorrect checkshot or bad

161 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

checkshot is left in, an incorrect velocity can be applied and may cause
inaccurate results when trying to tie the synthetic with the seismic data.

Checkshot points can easily be added, moved, or deleted. While the

active checkshot survey is being edited, it is possible to simultaneously
view a second checkshot survey, called the reference survey. Typically,
the reference survey would be the unedited checkshot or VSP series,
which may be over- or under-sampled, noisy, or otherwise unsuitable
due to acquisition geometry considerations.

It is possible to build an entire new survey, or work from a copy of an

existing survey. Options allow for an edited point to change either the
interval velocity of the layer immediately below the edited point, or to
propagate the change in time and depth values to all points below the
edited point while holding interval velocities constant. You can
instantly see edits applied to the data, in terms of deviation from the
reference survey, deviation of the corrected sonic log from the original
sonic log, and absolute interval velocities being incorporated into the
model.

Select Panes ➛ New Checkshot Diagnostics from the main menu.

The Checkshot Diagnostics dialog box opens.

Select Desired Pane Type

• Vint. Shows the Raw and Corrected sonic log as interval
velocities.

• Vint (Cor - Raw). Shows the difference between the Raw and
Corrected sonic log as interval velocities.

• Vint (Blocked). Shows the Raw and Corrected sonic log as

average interval velocities within each checkshot depth range.

• ITT. Shows the Raw and Corrected sonic log as interval transit
times.

• ITT (Cor - Raw). Shows the difference between the Raw and
Corrected sonic log as interval transit times.

• Time (2 Way Travel). Shows the total travel time calculated from
the Raw and Corrected sonic curves. The total travel time is
calculated by integrating the Raw and Corrected sonic curves.

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 162

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• Time (1 Way Drift). Shows the difference between the corrected

and raw sonic’s integrated travel time.

• Vave. Shows the average velocity calculated from the integrated

corrected and raw sonic curves.

Once the pane is placed, select Edit Data from the panes menu.
This opens the graphical editing tool.

Checkshot Graphical Editing parameters

Update Replacement Velocity

Toggled on to calculate a new replacement velocity to align the first
checkshot. In cases where the replacement velocity cannot be used to
align the first checkshot, SynTool calculates a time shift. If this
happens, you will get a message.

Reset knees at picks

Resets the knee points so that they fall on to the actual lithological
surfaces identified in StratWorks. This works only if Picks are
displayed. (Close Edit Data and select Pick ➛ Show Lines from
SynTool main menu).

Propagate Down
Any adjustment in a knee position is propagated downward to all knees
below the current one. Toggle off to apply adjustments only to the
current knee.

Snap X/Z
Restricts editing motion to the horizontal direction (Snap Z) or the
vertical direction (Snap X). Turning off both options gives you full
motion in adjusting knee points.

Checkshot Graphical Editing menu buttons

Undo/Redo

163 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Cancels or reapplies your last editing action.

Apply
Applies the new kneepoints positions to all other curves, particularly
the Active and Reference Checkshot surveys. The red curve now aligns
with the new position of the blue curve.

Save
Saves your edits permanently in the database. Be careful when using
the Save feature as it saves your edits to the current checkshot survey
and you will not be able to revert to the original. Selecting SaveDB
after closing the edit tool allows you to save the edited checkshot data
under a new checkshot name.

Close
Closes the editing tool. If you have not applied or saved your edits, they
will be discarded, but only if you answer Yes to the cancellation
message and specify Don’t Save.

Editing Knee Points

The active curve is now overlaid in blue. This is a copy of the active
curve that is used to adjust the checkshot data points. The red curve
remains in its original position until you apply your edits to the data.
Green markers indicate data points in the reference checkshot survey.
These cannot be edited or moved; they are displayed simply to help
guide the editing of the active checkshot survey.

Move the cursor over any knee point in the checkshot diagram and drag
the mouse to move it, as needed.

• The pointer changes to a circle when you are over a checkshot

knee point.

• As you move a knee point, you will notice two parallel horizontal
lines at the kneepoint position: one solid and one dashed. If
checkshots are applied, the solid line represents the cursor
location, and the dashed line represents the Z value where the knee
will move when you apply the change. If checkshots are not turned
on, the dashed line represents the Z value after the changes have
been applied and checkshots turned on. For instance, if you want

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 164

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

to align the new knee point with a certain event on the seismic
section, this feature will help you do it.

Mouse button functions

• MB1 adds new kneepoints anywhere along the curve (except over
an existing kneepoint).

• MB2 deletes kneepoints.

• MB3 displays a convenient pop-up menu with some of the same

options as the editing panel.

Reverse Scale
The Reverse Scale menu option flips the scale values and checkshot
diagnostic data.

Saving Checkshots
Edited checkshot surveys can be saved to the current project database.
You can overwrite the existing checkshot survey or save it as a new
survey. After editing checkshot pairs, you are prompted to save the
changes to the project database. If they are not saved at that time, you
are prompted again when exiting SynTool.

Checkshot Diagnostics View Parameters

Diagnostics

Type
See Select Desired Pane Type for diagnostic types.

Units
Enter the units in the Units popup dialog box.

165 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Checkshot Display
You can select any combination of line type and color for the curves
and horizontal lines in the checkshot display:

• Reference Markers

• Active Markers

• Reference Curve

• Active Curve

• Horizontal

Sonic Display
You can select line type and color for the different sonic types:

• RS Raw Sonic

• CS Corr. Sonic

• CR-RS

Scale
Set the display parameters for the checkshot diagnostic scale.

Label
Enter the label to annotate the checkshot diagnostic object. This
typically shows the checkshot diagnostic type you selected.

Type
Display the scale linearly or logarithmically between the Left and
Right amplitudes.

Left/Right
Specify the curve amplitudes for the left and right values of the scale
area.

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 166

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Width
Enter the desired width of the scale in centimeters (cm) or inches (in).

Annotation

Start Value
Enter a value to start the checkshot diagnostic’s scale area annotation.
Enter 0 to automatically determine a number.

Major Inc.
Enter the distance between text annotations and major grid lines.
Annotations increment from Start value. Enter 0 to automatically
determine a number that works well with the current scale width and
font size. Toggle on Grid to view the major grid lines.

Minor Inc.
Enter the distance between minor axis tick marks and minor grid lines.
Enter 0 to automatically determine a number that works well with the
current scale width and font size. Toggle on Grid to view the minor
grid lines.

167 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

How ITT Correction Affects Data

For the ITT method of checkshot correction, the interval transit time
(computed from the sonic for the depth range between to adjacent checkshot
points) is subtracted from the time between the checkshot points. This
difference is distributed equally among the samples of the sonic log such
that each sample is increased by the same amount.

Consider two checkshot intervals:

A: from 2001 m - 3000 m

B: from 3001 m - 4000 m

There are checkshots at 2000, 3000, and 4000 meter depths. Assume the
interval correction is calculated to be:

Interval A needs 1000 µsec total correction

Interval B needs -1000 µsec total correction

The correction applied to each ITT value (assuming the sonic is sampled at
1 meter intervals) is:

Interval A:+1 µs/metre

Interval B:-1 µs/metre

This means that the sonic value at a depth of 3000 m is adjusted by

+1 µs/metre and the sonic value at 3001 m is adjusted by -1 µs/metre. If the
sonic log was a constant through this zone before checkshot correction, it
will now have a 2 µs/metre kick between 3000-3001 meters.

If RC Sonic Directly was selected as your time-to-depth Source, this type of

correction produces artificial reflections at the checkshot.

See “Select Time-Depth Source” on page 52 for information on other time-

to-depth source options.

SynTool chooses ITT method to apply checkshots going in to the program

(if you toggled Apply Checkshots on at start-up).

Regardless of the method you select, you should always insert a few
checkshot diagnostic panes and a caliper and SP curve to check for hole
problems, sonic problems, or bad checkshots.

TD Tables for Time-to-Depth Conversion

SynTool does not use time-depth tables for time-to-depth conversion.
Time-to-depth calculations use the velocities contained in the time-to-
depth curve selected in the Startup dialog box.

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 168

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

The only way to make SynTool honor a particular time-depth table is to

import it and/or apply it as checkshots to the curve selected as the time-
to-depth curve.

Selecting a Time-Depth Table for Checkshot Corrections

Checkshot surveys are not sampled as finely as time-depth tables. They
are frequently sampled in even depth increments of perhaps 500 or
1000 ft. or irregularly sampled at formation boundaries or even some
combination of the two. Time-depth tables are frequently calculated at
every time sample.

Time-depth tables with too fine a sample interval will not give
satisfactory results. Therefore, SynTool warns you if the survey you
select has more points than SynTool considers reasonable for a
checkshot survey; you can then reselect another time-depth table.

When preparing a Time-Depth table to use in SeisWorks, Landmark

suggests to have time-depth pairs at the seismic sample rate. SeisWorks
performs a simple interpolation method using the checkshot table alone
to calculate time to depth calculations. SynTool has added information
created from the sonic to interpolate between checkshots. This could
cause a difference in pick or curve locations due to variations of the
interpolation methods. Having a time-depth pair at the seismic sample
rate resolves the interpolation differences.

Also, SynTool will inform you if the time-depth table you want to use
as a checkshot survey has a time-shift associated with it. The amount of
the shift is given, and you will be informed that the time shift will not
be applied to the checkshot time values. You can then use the table or
make another selection.

If there are no time-depth tables or checkshot surveys available that you

would like to use with the well, just select the New Survey option in the
checkshot selection dialog box during start-up. You can always enter
new checkshots or edit existing checkshots within the current session.

Viewing Different Checkshot Pair Effects

Using the Checkshot Table Editor, you can view the effects of different
checkshot pairs without having to delete them.

169 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

1. Select Checkshot process, toggle on a checkshot method, and

Edit Survey. The Checkshots Table Editor appears listing all of
the checkshot pairs for the current survey.

2. Using Delete and Apply, you can in effect “toggle individual”

checkshot pairs on and off to view the effects. When you are
finished, click on Undo until the buffer is cleared, then Close.

3. When prompted to cancel your changes, click on Yes.

4. When prompted to save checkshot changes, click on Don’t Save.

5. To get the original checkshot survey back again, click on Select

New Survey.

6. When prompted to save checkshot changes, click on Discard.

7. When the Select New Survey dialog box appears, double-click on

the original survey from the list panel.

8. Select a checkshot method and click on Apply to apply the

checkshots from the original survey, or click on Close to close the
Checkshot Process dialog box.

Saving Checkshot Surveys

Be sure to note the name of the well where you are going to save your
data. Checkshot tables saved while the Save as new survey option is
active can only be written to the well currently on display in SynTool,
not to another well in the database.

The Replace Existing Survey option can actually replace a time-depth

table or a checkshot survey in a different well. Be careful about
replacing time-depth tables with checkshot surveys as the original table
may be linked to various Seisworks displays. Session files written out
after a checkshot table is saved will open the newly saved checkshot
table instead of the table which was opened originally.

Changing Synthetics using Pseudo-Checkshots

You cannot click on the top and bottom of a time interval and then
select a new time to which the bottom of the interval will be stretched
or squeezed. But you can perform a similar operation using pseudo-
checkshot (time-depth) pairs. The following two methods are available:

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 170

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Manual Method
Time and depth mouse readouts at the bottom of the SynTool window
will help you input pseudo-checkshots (time-depth) pairs.

If you select RC Sonic Indirectly for calculating the time-depth

relationship when first entering SynTool, the character of the RC Sonic
will change very little as a result of applying the pseudo-checkshots. If
you select RC Sonic Directly for time-to-depth calculations, the
velocities in the RC Sonic will change in order to implement the
checkshots and these changes will have a direct effect on the RCs and
the resulting look of the synthetic.

To apply pseudo-checkshots to a selected depth range

1. Select the Checkshot process from the time-to-depth source.

2. Select the ITT checkshot method and Edit Active Survey. The
Checkshots Table Editor appears listing all of the time-depth pairs
for the current survey. You can now enter new values or edit
existing values.

Using Delete All cannot be Undone

Using Delete All cannot be undone. After using the Delete All icon and
entering new checkshot pairs, be careful not to overwrite the original
checkshot survey.

3. Click Delete All. All of the checkshot (time-depth pairs) are

deleted from the survey.

4. Point at the desired point of interest, and enter the depth from the
TVD (ft) readout at the bottom of the application window into the
ft column.

5. Point at the corresponding point of interest, and enter the time

from the Time (ms) readout into 1WT/2WT Sec.

6. Click Apply. The points you entered in the Checkshot Table Editor
are applied as checkshots.

7. Toggle on Update Replacement Velocity in the Checkshot

Process dialog box. Click Apply, then Close.

171 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Interactive Method
The following is an interactive method for changing synthetics using
pseudo-checkshots:

1. Overlay synthetics on the checkshot diagnostic and on the seismic

panes.

2. Overlay pick labels. Display only the picks to align with a seismic
event.

3. Select Edit Data for the Checkshot Graphical Editor.

4. Use MB2 to delete any invalid checkshot points in the checkshot

pane.

5. Click on Reset knees at picks to place kneepoints at the pick

depths.

6. Click on Snap Z in the Checkshot Graphical Editor panel.

7. Move the mouse cursor over a peak or trough on the overlaid

synthetic1.

8. Drag the cursor to change the diagnostic value at that depth,

effectively changing the associated time. Align the dashed
horizontal line with the correct peak or trough on the seismic.

9. Click Apply in the Graphical Checkshot Editor panel to apply

your changes.

Checkshot Troubleshooting

Checkshots do not line up with checkshot times/depths from survey

If checkshots do not line up with the checkshot times (or depths) from
the survey, you might have:

• forgotten to account for datum differences. For example, your

checkshots are below a datum of 114 feet and your time scale is at
a datum of 0 feet.

• used the wrong correction velocity. To have SynTool set the

correction velocity to reflect the survey, check that the Update
Replacement Velocity checkbox is toggled on. This option is

December 2003 Processes: Checkshots 172

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

automatically toggled off after you have applied checkshots and

closed the dialog box (preventing subsequent work with the
replacement velocity or the time shift from being overwritten).

• used polynomial checkshot correction. Due to the way it applies

checkshots, polynomial checkshot correction is not exact.

• clipped the corrected sonic. Sonic Clipping in the Checkshot

Process dialog box allows you to keep checkshot corrections from
introducing unreasonable values. If clipping occurs, you will be
warned.

In cases where a significant number of amplitudes have been

clipped, the checkshots will be noticeably misaligned. This usually
indicates a problem with the checkshot survey.

173 Processes: Checkshots December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Process

The AGC process is used to equalize time-variant amplitudes on a

seismic or synthetic trace. Applying AGC to a synthetic can improve its
correlation with seismic data that has also had an AGC applied. AGC is
available for all synthetic trace objects.

AGC Parameters

Time
Specify the sliding window length in milliseconds.

December 2003 Processes: AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Process 174

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

TV (Time Variant) Filter Process

The TV Filter process allows you to modify the frequency content and
phase spectrum of a signal. The TV Filter process is available for the
synthetics and applied to database synthetics and impedance logs.

Available filter types include:

• Trapezoid

• Ricker

• Klauder

• Butterworth

• ASCII

• Database filters

• None

Once a filter has been created and applied to one synthetic, it shows up
in the TV Filter dialog box for every other synthetic so it can be
applied easily.

Applying multiple filters

You can apply different filters to one synthetic, and see the effect of
each. Toggle the checkbox off for the current filter and toggle another
checkbox on for the filter you want to use. You can also share filters
defined for other synthetics instead of defining them again for each
synthetic.

Tieing Seismic
To assist with ties to your seismic data, the wavelet applied to the
synthetic extends to one-half the length of the operator beyond the end
of the synthetic to avoid truncating the reflection at the very bottom of
the well. This extension changes automatically with different filter
operator lengths.

175 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Improving tie by applying a filter and phase

To improve the tie, apply a filter using the Wavelet Spectra window to
view the changes. Notice that clicking on Apply or working with Phase
or User Lag settings applies the changes to the synthetic and updates
the Synthetic Correlation pane readouts.

Change the filter frequencies and notice how this affects the wavelet
spectra and the time shift in the Synthetic Correlation pane.

Now interactively adjust the time shift and phase shift numbers at the
bottom of the Synthetic correlation pane.

• Look at the degree of phase rotation in the Synthetic Correlation

pane.

• Set the degrees field to this value.

• Adjust the User Lag and notice how this changes the time shift in
milliseconds of the Synthetic Correlation pane. Continue adjusting
User Lag until the time shift goes to zero. This is the best estimate
of the phase of the seismic.

This is the best match in terms of both times and phase. The wavelet
shown in the Wavelet Spectra window is a visual representation of the
synthetic wavelet used to achieve that match.

When there is a time mismatch, you can account for it by shifting the
well data, the seismic data, or the synthetic wavelet.

Wavelet Spectra
When you click View Graph, a graphical display of the selected
wavelet’s time series, power spectrum amplitude and detrended phase
spectra appears.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 176

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

You can update the graph by clicking View Graph, or if you rotate the
phase with the graph open, you can see the effects through the graph.
This enables you to view the results of any changes before applying
them to your synthetic.

.mirarc initialization file

A MinPhasePercent=1 variable resides in the .mirarc initialization file.
This variable is coded as a percentage of maximum amplitude. The
default is 1, the minimum setting is 0 and the maximum setting is 80.
Any amplitude values below the threshold percentage you specify will
have the corresponding phase value set to zero for display.

TV Filter Parameters

TV Filter from another synthetic pane

Select a saved filter from another synthetic.

177 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Define TV Filter below

Click on the check box in the Use column, then select the specific filter
in the Filter Type column. Specify the time zone over which to apply
the filter.

When you click on the next checkbox in the Use column, this activates
the End Time for the first filter and the Start Time for the next filter.
Through this feature SynTool allows you to use consecutive filters.
However, you can also select a filter from the first row and one from the
fourth row. Enabling filters one at a time allows you to see the effects of
up to five filters on the same synthetic.

When you select a new filter type, a dialog box appears to specify
parameters. This dialog box also appears when you click Change>.

Minimum merge zone

Time ranges for each filter must be separated by at least this value. For
these merge zones, the adjacent filters are blended to form a smooth
transition. The first filter is automatically set to the start time of the
synthetic.

You cannot set the End Time for filter number one until you toggle on
the checkbox for filter number two.

Setting the Minimum Merge Zone

Short merge zones will cause very abrupt and unrealistic changes in the
synthetic’s frequency content. Filters in the TV Filter dialog box are
specified using non-overlapping windows. The filter from one window
is merged with the filter in the next deeper window over the merge
zone. It is recommended that you always keep the Minimum merge
zone greater than 200 ms when working with normal seismic
frequencies (0-100Hz).

Saving Wavelets
You can save the wavelet’s filter parameters to the database to apply
later as a filter to other synthetics using the Database Filter option.

You can also save any changes to the filter parameters in addition to
saving a new dephasing operator to accompany the wavelet to the
database.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 178

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

See Saving an Edited Curve or more information on Saving Wavelets.

Filter Menu buttons

• Apply implements the parameter settings and keep the dialog box
open.

• OK applies and close the dialog box.

• Close to close the dialog box without implementing any unapplied

changes.

Trapezoid Parameters

Frequencies

F1-F4
Define the trapezoid filter in frequencies. F1-F4 are the four corners of
the trapezoidal filter where F1 is the low cut and F4 is the high cut.

Smoothing
.

Smoothing in Previous Versions

In previous versions of SynTool, all trapezoid filters had smoothing

applied to round off the corners in the trapezoid, resulting in a less
“ringy” wavelet. In the current version, smoothing is separated out as an
explicit option. If you turn it off, the trapezoid corners will be sharper,
but the wavelet becomes more sensitive to filter length. To build a high
pass or low pass filter, smoothing must be turned off.

Low Pass or High Pass frequencies

Toggle on either low pass or high pass.

179 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.
Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator
Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input
filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
Enter a filter length in milliseconds. In general, longer filter operators
produce more accurate results. However, computation time is
increased.

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by advancing or delaying

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 180

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Ricker Parameters

Dominant Frequency
Specify the Dominant Frequency for the Ricker filter. Double-click in
the text field and type a value or use the stepper arrows.

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.
Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator
Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input
filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
Enter a filter length in milliseconds. In general, longer filter operators
produce more accurate results. However, computation time is
increased.

181 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by advancing or delaying

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

Klauder Parameters
Klauder filters are used to compare a synthetic trace to seismic data
recorded with a vibrating source.

Sweep Frequencies
Set the Start, End, and Length to match the seismic data’s original
recording parameters. Sweeps can go from low-to-high or high-to-
low frequencies.

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.
Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator
Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input
filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 182

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
Enter a filter length in milliseconds. In general, longer filter operators
produce more accurate results. However, computation time is
increased.

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by using the advance and delay arrows.

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

Butterworth Parameters

Frequencies
Specify the four control points for frequency (F1-F4).

100

x (F2, high) x (F3, high)

response (%)

x (F1, low) x (F4, low)

0 frequency Nyquist

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

183 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.

Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator
Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input
filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
Enter a filter length in milliseconds. In general, longer filter operators
produce more accurate results. However, computation time is
increased.

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by using the advance and delay arrows.

Filter Weights
Enter the filter weights for the four frequencies. As shown in the graph,
F1/F4 are low pass and F2/F3 are high pass.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 184

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

ASCII Filter Parameters

This option lets you apply an ASCII wavelet file extracted and saved in
Landmark ASCII format (or from other ASCII formats that have been
converted to Landmark ASCII), as a filter to your synthetic.

Extracted wavelet ASCII files must be in Landmark ASCII format. If

the format is not the same, use a text editor to insert the following
information in your file:

• line 1: “Landmark ASCII Wavelet”

• line2: number of filter samples in the file to import

• line 3: sample index (i.e. count starting with zero) of the Zero
Time reference of the filter operator. Most filters are symmetrical
and their zero time reference is the middle point in the operator.

• line 4: sample interval of the filter operator. SynTool resamples the

operator to match the current synthetic’s calculation sample
interval.

• line 5: filter coefficients begin

A sample filter file in Landmark ASCII format is shown below.

An example of lines 1 Landmark ASCII Wavelet

through 4 is attached as a 7
header to all wavelets 3
extracted using the 2
Landmark ASCII format -0.4606
option 0.1
0.839
zero reference point 1.000 filter coefficients
0.839
0.1
-0.4606
This sample file has seven filter coefficients sampled at 2 ms. The
fourth sample (index 3) is the zero reference point.

185 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

ASCII File
Select the ASCII filter file. SynTool generated wavelet ASCII files have
a .wvl extension.

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.
Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator
Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input
filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
This field is read-only. To change the filter length, you must re-extract
the wavelet and change the Length of Wavelet value in the Wavelet
Extraction dialog box.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 186

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by using the advance and delay arrows.

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

Database Filter Parameters

The Database Filter option lets you apply a database wavelet as a filter
to your synthetic.

You can view and apply the extracted wavelet from the synthetic or
synthetic overlay.

Wavelet Name
Select the name of the database wavelet file and click Load. You can
also use the dialog box to delete saved wavelets to the database.

Deleting Existing Wavelets

Exercise caution when deleting existing wavelets from the database as

they cannot be recovered.

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.
Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator

187 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input

filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
This field is read-only. To change the filter length, you must re-extract
the wavelet and change the Length of Wavelet value in the Wavelet
Extraction dialog box.

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by using the advance and delay arrows.

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

December 2003 Processes: TV (Time Variant) Filter Process 188

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Multiplier Process

Multipliers are available for all synthetics, the RC object, and seismic
sections. This process allows you to multiply the amplitude values by a
constant value. Here are some distinct differences in the multiplier
process:

• A multiplier applied to the RCs affects all synthetics.

• A multiplier applied to a particular synthetic only affects that

synthetic.

Multipliers are available for the following:

• synthetics and overlays

• database synthetics (and overlays)
• RC logs (and overlays); a multiplier applied to this log affects all
synthetics that use it for input.
• SEG Y seismic sections

Using the Multiplier Process to Reverse Display Polarity

You can enter a negative multiplier, using the Multiplier Process, for any
synthetic to reverse the currently applied display polarity, however, the scale
area and Edit Process List dialog box for synthetics will not reflect this
change.

Multiplier Parameters

Constant
Enter a multiplier value and click OK.

SeisWorks Removes Multiplier Process effects.

SeisWorks removes the effects of the multiplier process on the

synthetic (except for its effect on polarity) when viewed in SeisWorks.

Also, applying a multiplier has no effect on the correlation coefficient

because the amplitudes are normalized in the algorithm.

189 Processes: Multiplier Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Median Filter Process

Median filters allow you to smooth amplitude irregularities. Smoothing

is increased as you increase the filter length. Median filters should
contain an odd number of points and be greater than zero. You can also
choose to apply a second median filter if you desire. Two median filters
are available for all log curves and log curve overlays.

You may want to set the first filter in the Edit Process list to a larger
value and follow it with the second filter set to a smaller value. For
example, an 11 point filter followed by a 7 point filter. The 11 point
filter will remove peaks that are five samples or fewer in width and have
a smoothing effect on wider peaks.

Where the first filter has removed the peaks that are <5 samples in
width, there may be sharp “corners.” The 7 point filter then smooths out
the corners. Setting the second filter to about 4 points less than the first
filter does a good job of retaining curve character while removing the
sharp corners.

The following table suggests filter settings to use for both median
filters. The first column defines what is removed as noise.

Removal Width (in samples) Median Filter 1 Median Filter 2

<=5 11 7

<=6 13 9

<=7 15 11

<=20 41 37

Median Filter Parameters

Median Filter settings

Toggle on None for no median filter. Toggle on Apply and enter an odd
number of points; greater than zero.

December 2003 Processes: Median Filter Process 190

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

RC (Reflection Coefficient) Process

The RC process computes the reflection coefficients based on

impedance contrast. This feature defines the polarity of the data. Once
defined, it remains for all synthetics and reports until changed.

Polarity Conventions

You should find out the polarity convention used to process your seismic
data. Knowing your seismic’s polarity convention can make a difference
when you work with phase shifting or phase rotation. A common practice
before applying any bulk shifts is to get the best fit with checkshots and the
time variant filter process and applying a bulk shifts if necessary.

Some phase work is done automatically with the mixed-phased extraction

method. However, once applied as one of the filter processes, you can
modify the phase and reapply the filter if necessary.

RC Process Parameters

RC Calculation
Select one of the options for RC calculation.

• Primaries Only models primary reflections only.

• Attenuated Primaries & Multiples model attenuated primaries,

internal multiple primaries, and multiple RCs.

Reference

For a description of the calculation in this option, see Wuenschel,

P.C., 1960, “Seismogram Synthesis including multiples and
transmission coefficients,” Geophysics, V. 25, pp. 106-129.

Include Random Noise

Toggle on to include random noise. Enter a percentage of the maximum
RC amplitude. The noise is randomly generated each time the RCs are
calculated. For example, if your maximum RC amplitude is 1.0, and

191 Processes: RC (Reflection Coefficient) Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

you enter 5% as the noise percentage, random noise values in the range
from -0.05 to +0.05 is added to each sample.

Thresholds

Discard RCs Less Than

All computed RCs whose absolute value is less than this value are
discarded. This option can remove very small RCs resulting from
integration noise in sparse reflector models. It also allows you to create
sparsely populated reflection coefficient series.

Clip RCs Greater Than

All computed RCs greater than this value are clipped to this value. This
option can remove high RCs resulting from noise problems in the
sonic/density logs. It is also used to suppress the range of amplitudes in
a synthetic without applying an AGC.

Defaults
Toggle on to change the thresholds to the default values. The default
Discard RCs Less Than is 1e-05 and the default Clip RCs Greater
Than is 1.

Polarity Convention
Select a polarity convention. Your selection determines the polarity in
all of displays and reports.

Peak (+) = Low-To-High Impedance

Toggle on to use a positive reflection coefficient. Isolated reflections
use a peak for a zero phase wavelet.

Trough (-) = Low-To-High Impedance

Toggle on to use a negative reflection coefficient. Isolated reflections
use a trough for a zero phase wavelet.

December 2003 Processes: RC (Reflection Coefficient) Process 192

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Change Polarity Process

Change Polarity Process is only available from the synthetic and

database synthetic menus. When selected the polarity changes from the
current RC polarity convention for the current synthetic. To change the
polarity for all synthetics, use the RC Process.

Using the Multiplier Process to Reverse Display Polarity

You can enter a negative multiplier in the Multiplier Process, to reverse any
synthetic. However, the scale area and Edit Process List dialog box for
synthetics does not reflect this change as does the Change Polarity
Process.

193 Processes: Change Polarity Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Impedance Process

The Impedance process is available only for the Impedance pane.

SynTool calculates in the time domain an acoustic impedance from a P-
wave sonic and/or density and an elastic impedance from a Shear-wave
sonic.

The default settings for Elastic Impedance result in an Impedance log

that is equal to that computed by Acoustic Impedance. Modifying the
default Impedance process parameters allows you to simulate the
impact of varying angles of incidence or geologic conditions.

(Show) Impedance
The (Show) Impedance option is located on the Empty Scale popup
menu. The impedance log appears as an overlay with its own popup
menu.

Acoustic Impedance Parameters

To change the settings for the acoustic impedance process, popup the
menu and select Edit Process list.

Compute Impedance
Select one of the following compute methods:

• Sonic and Density uses both the RC P-wave sonic and RC density
to calculate acoustic impedance.

• Sonic calculates acoustic impedance using only the RC P-wave

sonic:

• Density calculates RCs using the RC density log:

The time-to-depth source curve is still used to perform the time-to-

depth conversion (integration).

Elastic Impedance Parameters

To change the settings for the elastic impedance process, popup the
menu and select Edit Process list.

December 2003 Processes: Impedance Process 194

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Elastic Impedance

Angle of Incidence
Enter the Angle of Incidence in degrees.

Vp/Vs ratio
Enter the Vp/Vs ratio, or P-wave velocity to Shear-wave velocity ratio
over the range you wish to model the impact of incidence angle on
amplitude.

Order
Toggle on one of the following orders for the AVO Approximation:

• 1st Order

• 2nd Order 2nd order is recommended for angles of incidence

above 30 degrees.

Using Elastic Impedance

When a Shear Wave Sonic is input in addition to P-Wave and/or
Density, SynTool automatically computes elastic impedance. Elastic
impedance is a virtual quantity which, when used to compute angle-
dependent reflectivity, is analogous to acoustic impedance in the
computation of normal-incidence reflectivity. It is derived from
approximations to the Zeoppritz equations. In addition to P-wave sonic
and density information, elastic impedance requires input Shear-wave
sonic information, as well as a constant representing the “background”
Vp/Vs ratio, and the angle of incidence

Elastic impedance and acoustic impedance are identical for the case
where the angle of incidence equals 0˚ (the default setting). Thus, it is
possible to do both acoustic impedance and elastic impedance
modeling for any particular curve family which includes shear-wave
sonic information.

One feature of elastic impedance is that, just like acoustic impedance, it

is a localized quantity, not dependent on overburden velocities, raypath
effects and the like. The benefit of this is that it is not necessary to build
an entire acoustic model to estimate reflection coefficients of any given

195 Processes: Impedance Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

interface and incidence angle. As such, however, it is important to note

the following points:

• Elastic impedance uses a constant incidence angle over the entire

length of the synthetic. This does not match the model of either a
single raypath or a single far-offset trace within a standard CDP
gather. The elastic impedance synthetic calibration against an
offset stack section is only valid at the level where the selected
angle of incidence corresponds to the selected CDP offset
distance. To calibrate the elastic impedance synthetic against an
entire seismic trace, it is necessary to generate a constant angle
stack, which can be done using PROMAX or other seismic
processing systems.

• Elastic impedance is not an AVO modeling system. It does not

perform ray-tracing or generate synthetic CDP gathers. It is simply
a mechanism to model interface reflectivities at non-normal
incidence angles.

December 2003 Processes: Impedance Process 196

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process

True Vertical Depth (TVD) corrections are available for all log curves.
TVD corrections cannot be applied to a single curve. They are applied
to all curves or to none.

If you save a TVD corrected curve to the database, then display the
curve with curves that have not been TVD corrected, SynTool will
remind you that TVD correction has been applied and will not be
applied again.

Correcting Log Depths

Because wells are not drilled in an absolutely straight vertical line, you
may want to correct all of the log curves’ measured depths to their true
vertical depths. TVD corrections require information, recorded at the
well site, relating measured log depths (MD) to their true vertical
depth.

Correcting Checkshots
Most checkshot surveys are designed, recorded, and processed to
record vertical travel times. For this reason, the sonic curve depths
should almost always be true-vertical-depth corrected before you apply
the checkshot correction. If you are uncertain how the checkshot survey
was prepared, and whether the depths and times are truly vertical,
consult with the original checkshot report provided by your contractor.

TVD Correction Parameters

TVD Correct
Toggle on after you have made a TVD correction. TVD corrections are
applied to all log curves.

Curves are stored in OpenWorks with a flag indicating whether or not

TVD corrections have been previously applied. SynTool will not TVD
correct any curves that were TVD corrected in a previous session.

Edit TVD
Use SynTool’s Table Editor to edit TVD information.

197 Processes: TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Editing TVD Data

Using the table editor, you can edit measured depth (MD), true vertical
depth (TVD), NS and EW distance, and generate a TVD report.

TVD Validation
After TVD values are entered, they are validated to ensure that they are
geometrically consistent. This means that the Measured Depth (MD) of
a given segment must be greater than or equal to the straight-line
distance between adjacent TVD, NS, and EW points.

straight line distance (SLD)

measured depth (MD) MD SLD

It is physically impossible for the measured depth to be less than the

straight line distance between two adjacent points. However, the MD
can be longer if the well bore wiggles around between TVD, NS, EW
measurements.

After editing TVD information, SynTool warns you if the numbers are
inconsistent. You are allowed to specify a percentage error that is
acceptable to process the specific TVD survey. SynTool saves the new
error percentage you enter for later use (TVDValidationSlop= variable
in the .mirarc initialization file).

December 2003 Processes: TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process 198

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Table Editor

When entering TVD information, the following must apply:

• The NS distance and EW distance values are the total distances

from the well origin, not the change in distance from the
previous TVD point.

• North/South distances should be positive numbers to the north.

• East/West distances should be positive numbers to the east.

For information on using a table editor, see the Table Editor.

Saving TVD Data

When you click OK in the Table editor, the Save TVDs dialog box
appears.

Calculation method
Select one of the following calculation methods (This does not affect
how SynTool reads the x,y,z, coordinates):

• unknown
• Tangential
• Average Angle

199 Processes: TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Radius of Curvature
Calculation methods are discussed in the OpenWorks Geodata Loading
manual in the section “Loading Directional Surveys.”

The bottom hole position, measured depth and the number of points
in the TVD table are displayed in this window.

Remarks
Enter any remark about the TVD correction.

Correcting Bad Values in a TVD Survey

TVD surveys can be read directly from the database or entered
manually (Edit Process List ➛ TV Correction ➛ Edit TVD). If you
have bad values in your TVD survey, SynTool will warn you and turn
TVD corrections off.

To correct your TVD survey

1. Select Edit Process List from any log curve, then double-click on
the TVD Correction process. The TVD dialog box appears.

2. Click Edit TVD. The TVD survey is loaded into SynTool’s Table
Editor.

3. Make the necessary corrections to the table.

If the problem is a duplicate TVD point, delete one of the points. If you
are not sure, apply TVD correction and SynTool issues a warning
message that may contain the location of the bad points. You can also
check the Table Editor for any typos in one of the cells.

You can also use the OpenWorks Well Data Manager to edit TVD
surveys using the Position Log data form for the selected well. (Path:
OpenWorks Command Menu ➛ Data ➛ Management ➛ Well Data
Manager ➛ Select the Well from the Well List, then select the Position
Log data form.)

December 2003 Processes: TVD (True Vertical Depth) Correction Process 200

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

User Defined Transform Process

The User Defined Transform process allows you to perform

mathematical transforms on a curve. It is available for all curves

The User Defined Transform is defined by:

E1 E2
output = I + M × 〈 input〉 × { 〈 depth – D〉 }

Where:

I = intercept (constant shift)

M = curve multiplier

E1 = curve exponent

depth = depth value of current log sample being modified

D = depth shift to apply to current depth sample

E2 = exponent to be applied to the depth term (depth-D)

Do not enter unreasonable values

Save any new checkshot, TVD entries, or log edits before experimenting
with this process. Entering unreasonable values can cause SynTool to crash.
You will lose any new data entered during a session.

• Do not multiply the time-to-depth curve by zero (0).

• Do not try to use fractional exponents if the log has negative numbers.

The following warning appears when this process is selected.:

User Defined Transform Parameters

The transform you defined in the startup parameters appears as the
default in the Predefined Equation window.

201 Processes: User Defined Transform Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

After dismissing the warning prompt, the Generalized Transform

dialog box appears.

Predefined Equation
Select User Defined Transform to create your own equation. You can
change the equation by entering different values under Coefficients and
Curve Units.

In addition to User Defined Transform, the following equations are

available:

• Faust converts a resistivity curve to a sonic curve. SynTool

expects input units of ohm-m and suggests output units of ft/s.

• Conductivity Faust converts a conductivity curve to a sonic

curve. SynTool expects input units of mho-m and suggests output
units of ft/s.

• Gardner converts a sonic to a density curve. SynTool expects

input units of ft/s and suggests output units of g/cc.

• Inverse Gardner converts a density curve to a sonic curve.

SynTool expects input units of g/cc and suggests output units of
ft/s.

• Castagna Compressional to Shear Velocity converts a sonic

curve to a shear curve. SynTool expects input units of m/s and
suggests output units of m/s.

Coefficients
Change the following coefficients of the user defined transform:

• Multiplier [M]

• Exponent [E1]

• Intercept [I]

• Depth Shift [D]

• Exponent [E2}

December 2003 Processes: User Defined Transform Process 202

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Expected Input Units

Toggle between feet or meters.

Curve units

Input Unit Type

Enter amplitude units for the input curve.

Output Unit Type

SynTool sets the curve header’s unit field to this value after
computations are performed. To leave the output units the same as the
input units, set this field to “any.”

Do not use this option to change curve units. SynTool gets all its curve
units from the settings of the current OpenWorks Measurement System.
The curve units are only changed when the Measurement System is
changed.

To change curve units, from the OpenWorks Command menu, select

Project ➛ Project Status ➛ Options ➛ Change Measurement
System.

Application options
Select how to apply the transform from the following choices:

• Don’t Apply

• Apply to Whole Curve

• Apply to Depth Range and enter the Start/End depths in feet or

meters. If you entered a value for Output Unit Type, the whole
curve is given that unit. This option would be over ridden.

SynTool automatically converts the depth sample interval if you

select a unit different than what is currently displayed in the vertical
scale.

203 Processes: User Defined Transform Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Saving the transform

You can click Save or be prompted when you click OK for the Save
Transform dialog box.

Select a name from the list to replace an existing transform or enter a

new name. After a transform is saved, it is available in the Predefined
Equation list for current and future SynTool sessions.

December 2003 Processes: User Defined Transform Process 204

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Unit Conversion

When necessary, SynTool inserts a process for converting from one set
of units to another. This process happens automatically and is not
editable.

205 Processes: Unit Conversion December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Range Enforcement Process

The Range Enforcement process ensures that the time-to-depth source

you selected at start-up has suitable velocities for that process.

Range Enforcement Parameters

Log amplitudes that fall below the specified minimum value
(Interpolate Below) and above the specified maximum value
(Interpolate Above) are interpolated from the two nearest in-range
values. The two in-range amplitudes chosen are the closest shallower
and closest, deeper, in-range curve amplitudes.

Select minimum and maximum values

Interpolate Below
Any amplitude that is less than this value is interpolated.

Interpolate Above
Any amplitudes that is greater than this value is interpolated.

December 2003 Processes: Range Enforcement Process 206

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Rotation Process

The Rotation process applies a phase rotation (in degrees) for any
database synthetic.

Phase Rotation Parameters

degrees
Enter a phase rotation value in degrees. It can be a negative number. As
you adjust the rotation, you see the results in the database synthetic
pane.

207 Processes: Rotation Process December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Time Shift Process

The Time Shift process applies a time shift to any database synthetic.

Time Shift Parameters

Time Shift
Enter a time shift in milliseconds. This value can be a negative number.
As you change this value, you see the results applied to the database
synthetic pane.

December 2003 Processes: Time Shift Process 208

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Session Files and Templates

Session files (.msc) let you save the current screen display, all the
parameter settings and processes, and a reference to the database (for
all displayed objects) to a file you can later access.

• Session Files

• Templates

• Working With Files and Templates

• Sharing Templates and Session Files

• Renaming OpenWorks Projects

• Importing a SEGY file from Seis2D

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: 210

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Session Files

Session files (.msc) let you save the current screen display, all the
parameter settings and processes, and a reference to the database (for
all displayed objects) to a file you can later access.

SynTool and SeisWorks/2D share identical .msc file extensions.

SynTool appends a .msc extension to session filenames. SeisWorks/2D

appends a .msc extension to its variable shift mistie files. SeisWorks writes
files to specified project directories. You can have SynTool write your
session files where you choose. Since your .mirarc resides in your home
directory, you may want to create a directory within your home directory for
session files and templates.

The directory where your session files and templates are written to is
specified by the TemplateDirectory= variable in the .mirarc initialization file
(page 498). If this variable is not specified, your session files and templates
are written to your home directory. See Appendix B: Initialization File
(.mirarc) for more information on the .mirarc initialization file.

Template files (.mst) are identical in structure to a session file.

However, they contain no reference to the database or other templates
and they cannot be opened as session files. Session files can be opened
as templates and then saved as a session file. This allows you to view or
use the display parameters and screen display from another person’s
work session while keeping the original work session settings,
parameters, and ties to the database intact.

If you want to use another interpreter’s session file because of the well
data information it contains, you can open the original session file.
SynTool will not change the session file until you decide to save it, but
to ensure the integrity of the original session file, you should save the
file to a different name before you begin to work with it.

When you open a session file as a template, you will need to reselect
the well information contained in the template. (SynTool will prompt
you for the necessary information.) The display parameters and screen
display will be the same as the session file from which the template was
created. You can then save the template as a session file.

After creating the start-up display, it is recommended that you first save
a session file before continuing your work. You should periodically
save your work session in order to save any display parameters or edits
you make along the way.

211 Session Files and Templates: Session Files December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

You can save the current SynTool display to a session file, which you
can access later to restore the display and its attributes. A session file
contains the following information from the display:

• display parameters (datums, correction velocity, etc.)

• a list of all objects (logs, seismic, wavelets, etc.) displayed on

screen

• a reference to the database for each displayed object (Session files

do not actually contain data, only a reference to the OpenWorks
project and ORACLE database instance from which the object
data was originally read.)

• the display parameters of each object (scales, colors, line styles,

etc.)

• the processing list and parameters for each object (filters,

checkshots, TVD correction, AGC, etc.)

• the display ranges for each object

A session file saved in a released version of SynTool should be

compatible with future SynTool releases.

Session Files and Database Changes

If you or another user modify the exploration data referenced by a session

file, the session file when restored in a later session will not display data on
screen in exactly the same manner as when you saved the session file. The
data will reflect the changes made to the database.

SeisWorks Projects
When opening a new session or reading a template file, SynTool now
asks you to select a SeisWorks project. This request makes it easier to
specify the correct time datum within the SynTool session before you
specify the user range of the model. However, if the SynTool session is
not tied to any particular SeisWorks project, you can also enter the time
datum directly.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Session Files 212

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Measurement Systems
SynTool gets all its curve units from the settings of the current
OpenWorks Measurement System as specified in the Project Status
utility of OpenWorks. To display DT curve values in m/s, for example,
simply select or generate a measurement system in which preferred unit
for unit type “sonic velocity or transit time” is m/s. Automatic curve
ranges come from the Session Scales values of the Curve Dictionary.

If you change the measurement system while SynTool is running, all

objects in the current SynTool session will dynamically update to
display in the preferred units of the newly selected measurement
system.

If you save a session file while one measurement system is selected,

and later restore that session while a different measurement system is
selected, the objects will be displayed in the preferred units of the
currently selected measurement system.

SynTool defaults to the home directory when attempting to open or

save a session file. You can change the location of this directory by
setting the TemplateDirectory= variable in the .mirarc initialization file.

213 Session Files and Templates: Session Files December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Templates

Template files are identical in structure to session files, except for two
important differences:

• Templates have a special flag that indicates that all references to

data in the file should be ignored.

• Templates cannot be opened as a session file.

SynTool provides template files so you can retain desired display

parameters and a processing sequence that you can apply to other data.

Because session files are identical in structure to templates, a session

file can also be opened as a template. If you decide to save any changes
to the session file you opened as a template, you can save the template
as a session file.

When opening a template, or a session file as a template, you are

prompted to select an object for the RC Sonic. If you do not select an
object to be the RC Sonic during the template opening sequence,
SynTool will exit.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Templates 214

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Working With Files and Templates

From the main menu option you can open a well from the project
database, open a session or template file, and show well information, as
well as print and access other commonly used options (for example,
Database utilities, a note taking program, a calculator, an OS Window,
or another application if you know the path to its executable).

Saving a Session File

After creating the start-up display, it is recommended that you first save
a session file before continuing your work. You should periodically
save your work session in order to save any display parameters or edits
you make along the way.

When you save a session file, give the file a unique name. There are no
restrictions on naming a session file other than those imposed by your
operating system. For example, you may not be able to use certain
symbols in the filename.

The file extension .msc is automatically appended to the filename so

that SynTool will recognize it as a session file.

To save a session file

1. Choose File ➛ Save Session File from the SynTool main menu to
open the File dialog box.

2. Select the appropriate directory and enter a name for the session
file (128 character limit including spaces).

SynTool automatically appends a .msc extension to the file name

when you click on OK.

3. Click on OK to save the file.

The current SynTool display, including all display and processing

parameters will be saved.

215 Session Files and Templates: Working With Files and Templates December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Opening a Session File

The four most recently saved session files will be listed at the bottom of
the File menu in the order: last saved listed first. Click on one of these
files to display its contents in SynTool.

You can open a session file using one of the following methods:

• Click on one of the session files listed at the bottom of the File
menu. (The last four saved are shown. If you want to open a
session file not listed, use the method described below.)

• Choose File ➛ Open Session File from the SynTool main menu.
The File Selection dialog box appears. Choose the session file
(.msc) you want to open and click on OK.

The information is displayed in the SynTool window. You can then

continue to work with the data.

Changing Sessions/Opening New Sessions Without Exiting SynTool.

You do not need to exit SynTool in order to open another session file or start
a new session. You can also view well data from another project.

Opening a Session File as a Template

If you have a session file that contains the display setup and processes
that you want to use with other data, you can open the session file as a
template.

For instance, you may have a session file from an older OpenWorks
project that you want a newer OpenWorks project to recognize. Open
the session file as a template and this will allow you to access the newer
well information while retaining the display parameters from the older
session file.

To open a session file as a template

1. Choose File ➛ Open Template from the SynTool main menu.

The File Selection dialog box appears.

2. Select a session file (.msc) instead of a template file (.mst) and

click on OK. Follow the procedure for selecting well information.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Working With Files and Templates 216

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Failure to Supply Information when Opening a Template

When opening a template, or a session file as a template, you are

prompted to select an object for the RC Sonic. If you do not select an
object to be the RC Sonic during the template opening sequence,
SynTool will exit.

The session file is opened as a template (no links to the database).

Saving a Template
When you save a template file, give the file a unique name. There are
no restrictions on naming a template file other than those imposed by
your operating system. The file extension .mst is automatically
appended to the filename so that SynTool will recognize it as a template
file.

SynTool defaults to the home directory when attempting to open or

save a session file. You can change the location of this directory by
setting the TemplateDirectory= variable in the .mirarc initialization file
(page 498).

1. Select File ➛ Save Template from the SynTool main menu to

open the File dialog box.

2. Select a directory if necessary and enter a name for the template

file (128 character limit including spaces).

SynTool automatically appends the .mst extension.

3. Click on OK to save the file.

Opening a Template
When opening a template, or a session file as a template, you are
prompted to select an object for the RC Sonic. If you do not select an
object to be the RC Sonic during the template opening sequence,
SynTool will exit.

If you open a session file as a template you will need to reselect well
information because templates do not have a tie to the database. If your
desire is to use well data information from a specific session file, you
will need to open the original session file. SynTool will not change the

217 Session Files and Templates: Working With Files and Templates December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

session file until you decide to save it, but to ensure the integrity of the
original session file, you should save the file to a different name before
you begin to work with it.

The only information you will retain by opening a session file as a

template will be display parameters, the screen display and the
processing sequence of the original session file.

To open a template

1. Choose File ➛ Open Template.

The File dialog box appears.

2. Select the file (either a session file or a template file) you want to
open and click on OK, then answer any prompts for well
information.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Working With Files and Templates 218

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Sharing Templates and Session Files

Session files are typically not shareable among different users, unless
you are certain that the other user will have access to the exact same
database from which the session file was created.

Session files and templates cannot be shared between different database

systems. For example, a session file or template created for OpenWorks
2.9x cannot be shared with OpenWorks 4.0x users.

219 Session Files and Templates: Sharing Templates and Session Files December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Renaming OpenWorks Projects

If you rename OpenWorks projects and Oracle database instances, you

will need to run the utility synchprj on any session and template files
you wish to use with the renamed projects. While synchprj can change
the name of any text string in the binary file, it is most commonly used
to update the OpenWorks project and/or the Oracle OWSYSSID.

The following workflow shows how to use synchprj to update the

OpenWorks project and OWSYSSID:

1. Change directory (cd) to a directory that contains the session or

template files (*.msc or *.mst).

2. At a command line prompt type:

synchprj

and enter the OpenWorks Project name when prompted.

3. Enter the old OWSYSSID. For example: owhammer.

4. Enter the new OpenWorks project name when prompted.

5. Enter the new OWSYSSID. For example: owhatchet.

6. When prompted for the context (session) file prompt, type the
name of the original session or template file including the .msc or
mst extension: jke_fl2_xfer_to_R2003.msc

If you have more than one session file to change, you may enter
their filenames sequentially. When you are through, enter done to
stop.

synchprj then creates the new session files with the change to the
OWSYSSID, saving the original session file with the extension
.save.

7. Run synchprj again with the same filenames.

8. At the project prompts, enter the old and new project names,
respectively.

9. Re-enter the session filenames and then type done.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Renaming OpenWorks Projects 220

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

The new session files should now open in the new OpenWorks project.

221 Session Files and Templates: Renaming OpenWorks Projects December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Importing SEGY

Importing a SEGY file from Seis2D

You can create a SEG Y (.sgy) file from a SeisWorks/2D project and
import it into SynTool as a seismic section. When you choose this
option, an application is started (SegPort2) that reads a specified line of
seismic data and outputs it to a file in 32-bit IBM floating point format.

1. Select File ➛ Seis2D to SEGY.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY 222

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

2. Click on a project in the 2D Seismic Projects list.

Lines associated with the project you select appear in the Lines
within this project list.

SynTool reads the plist.dat file for the current OpenWorks project
selected. If SynTool issues an error trying to open a project, check
to see that the project you are trying to access has been associated
with the current OpenWorks project. To read the plist.dat file, type
plist in an xterm window.

Also check the dir.dat file ($OWHOME/conf) to see if the project

directories exist for the seismic project you want to use.

3. Click on the desired line from the project you selected.

The CDP range and SP# at the bottom of the dialog box change
automatically.

4. Click on one of the process level files available for the selected
line.

For more information on process level and version, refer to the

Batch Control Monitor manual from the SeisWorks 2D or 3D
manual set.

5. Select a CDP range to export.

When you choose a line, the First and Last fields are dynamically
updated with the first and last CDP numbers in the file. To change
these values

• Place the cursor in the appropriate text field, press Button 1

twice to highlight the text.
• Enter the desired value. You can also use the arrows to scroll the
displayed value higher or lower by increments of 1.
Notice that the SP# for this CDP field updates accordingly. The
values you enter must be within the range of the input file limits.

223 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

CDP Order in the Output File

CDP numbering in the output file always increases, even if the CDP
numbering in the input file decreases. If the CDP range selected for
output is numbered in descending order (for example, 100 to 1), CDPs
in the output file will increment from the number specified in the First
field (for example, output CDP numbering would start at 100 and
continue 101, 102, 103, etc.).

6. Toggle on View List File if you want SynTool to display a list file
(.lst) of the newly created .sgy file.

The file appears, in the text editor specified by the FileViewer=

entry in the .mirarc initialization file, page 496, after you name the
file and click on OK in the File dialog box shown on the next page.

The list file displays the information written to the .sgy file. The last
line in the list file displays the computed trace distance and a
northing angle for coding an azimuth. Also displayed is the time
datum for the project from which you generated the .sgy file. When
displayed in SynTool, this value is automatically inserted into the
Time text field in the Datum Info dialog box (if the current value in
the dialog box is not the same).

If using preSynTool3.x SEG Y (.sgy) files and you want to view the
synthetic in SeisWorks, set the Time text field in the Datum Info
dialog box (page 124) to the same value as the SeisWorks project
datum.

If you do not want to view the list file, toggle View list file off. You
can view the .lst file at a later time, using an xterm window
(page 310).

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY 224

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

7. Click on Create SEGY to create the .sgy file and open a dialog
box similar to the following.

• Use the Filter field if necessary to change to the directory

where you want save the .sgy file.

• Place the cursor in the Select name for SEGY file text field,
and type a name for the SEG Y file. You do not need to type the
.sgy extension.

• Click on OK.

How to Use the Filter Field

SynTool defaults to your home directory unless you specify another

directory using the SegyDirectory= entry in the .mirarc initialization
file (page 497). To change the directory, enter the full pathname of the
desired directory in the Filter field and click on the Filter button.

To see a listing of all files in that directory, type the “*” character at the
end of the pathname. To see a specific listing of files (for example, all
files ending with the .sgy extension), type the “*” character followed
by the extension.

The SEG Y file is created and available for display.

225 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

If View List File was toggled on, the .sgy file contents are displayed
in a file viewer (specified by the FileViewer= entry in the .mirarc
initialization file).

An example of a 2D SEG Y .lst file is shown below.

Importing SEGY files from Seis3D

This option creates a SEG Y (.sgy) file from a SeisWorks/3D project.
SynTool can then import this file for display. When you choose this
option, an application is started (SegPort3) that reads a specified range
of seismic data and outputs it to a file in 32-bit IBM floating point
format.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY 226

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

1. Select File ➛ Seis3D to SEGY.

2. Select the screen to place the Seis3D to SEGY dialog box.

3. Click on a project from the 3-D Seismic Projects list.

.3dv files associated with the project you select appear in the 3DV
files list.

SynTool reads the plist.dat file for the current OpenWorks project
selected. If SynTool issues an error trying to open a project, check
to see that the project you are trying to access has been associated
with the current OpenWorks project. To read the plist.dat file, type
plist in an xterm window.

227 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Also check the dir.dat file ($OWHOME/conf) to see if the project

directories exist for the seismic project you want to use.

4. Click on the desired .3dv file from the 3DV Files list.

Notice that the Selected Range to Export fields change

automatically according to your selection.

5. Select a range to export.

When you choose a .3dv file, the Line/Trace and From/To fields are
dynamically updated with the entire range of the selected .3dv file.
To change these values

• Double-click in the appropriate text field.

• Enter the desired value.

Depending on how you enter the values, you can specify a line, trace,
or arbitrary line. The values entered must not exceed the line/trace
limits of the input file. You can also use the arrows to scroll the
displayed value higher or lower by increments of 1.

CDP Order in the Output File

The numbering of the CDPs in the output file is based on the specified
line and trace ranges of the input file. If the number of traces in the
range exceeds the number of lines, the output CDP numbers will be
based on the trace numbers. If the number of lines exceeds the number
of traces, the output CDP numbers will be based on the line numbers.
The CDP numbering in the output file always increases, even if the
line/trace numbering in the input file decreases. For example, if the
input line/trace range is specified as follows:

LINETRACE

From105
To11

The output CDP numbering would start at 10 (more lines in the range
than traces) and continue 11, 12, etc.
6. Toggle on View List File if you want SynTool to display a list file
(.lst) of the newly created .sgy file.

The file appears, in the text editor specified by the FileViewer=

entry in the .mirarc initialization file, page 496, after you name the
file and click on OK in the File dialog box below.

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY 228

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

The list file displays the information written to the .sgy file. The last
line in the list file displays the computed trace distance and a
northing angle for coding an azimuth. Also displayed is the time
datum for the project from which you generated the .sgy file. When
displayed in SynTool, this value is automatically inserted into the
Time text field in the Datum Info dialog box (if the current value in
the dialog box is not the same).

If using preSynTool3.x SEG Y (.sgy) files and you want to view the
synthetic in SeisWorks, set the Time text field in the Datum Info
dialog box (page 124) to the same value as the SeisWorks project
datum.

If you do not want to view the list file, toggle View list file off. You
can view the .lst file at a later time, using an xterm window
(page 310).

7. Click on Create SEGY to create the .sgy file and open the
following dialog box.

• Use the Filter field if necessary to change to the directory where

you want save the .sgy file.

229 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

How to Use the Filter Field

SynTool defaults to your home directory unless you specify

another directory using the SegyDirectory= entry in the .mirarc
initialization file (page 497). To change the directory, enter the full
pathname of the desired directory in the Filter field and click on
the Filter button.

To see a listing of all files in that directory, type the “*” character
at the end of the pathname. To see a specific listing of files (for
example, all files ending with the .sgy extension), type the “*”
character followed by the extension.

• Place the cursor in the Select name for SEGY file text field,
and type a name for the SEG Y file. You do not need to type the
.sgy extension. Click on OK.

If View List File was toggled on, the .sgy file contents are displayed
in a file viewer (specified by the FileViewer= entry in the .mirarc
initialization file). An example of a 3D SEG Y .lst file is shown
below.

Example 3D SEG Y .lst File

December 2003 Session Files and Templates: Importing SEGY 230

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

SeisWell

SeisWell is a SynTool module that lets you extract synthetic wavelets

from the seismic data, based on a range of input parameters. You can
generate and select any number of wavelets with differing extraction
parameters and extracted from different seismic traces or range of
traces.

• Overview

• Launching SeisWell

• Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet

December 2003 - 232

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Overview

SeisWell helps you extract and apply synthetic wavelets. When

SeisWell is started, SynTool passes it (via PD) a Seisworks project
name, line name (2D projects), a seismic file name, and current well
information including the active reflection coefficient series.

SeisWell does not make use of trace range information in SynTool. It

loads data around the midpoint specified in the extraction parameters.
In particular, for 3D projects, it loads a volume of data as opposed to a
line, trace or arbitrary line section of data. Seiswell lets you:

• compare many traces of the seismic data to synthetic traces, based

on user-specified parameters

• calculate a “goodness of fit” for each seismic trace over each time
range of the seismic data (a theoretical value that helps identify
differences between the synthetic and the real seismic)

• display signal-to-noise ratios in one or more color-coded diagrams

that help you quickly identify the location of the “best-fit” wavelet

• extract the wavelet from the location that you select and display
the wavelet spectra

• recalculate the synthetic based on the currently extracted wavelet

• generate scatter plots and other statistical diagrams that you can
use to evaluate the results

• extract and apply multiple wavelets using various techniques

• extract the wavelet and automatically display it, or save it to the

database

This manual describes how to use the SeisWell utilities to perform each
of the tasks listed above. For more information on the underlying
technology, how to select input parameters, and how to interpret the
output statistics, please refer to the online document: “SeisWell
Supplemental Guide” found in the Support section of the LGC website
(www.lgc.com).

233 SeisWell: Overview December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Launching SeisWell

When starting SeisWell from the main menu, you can select seismic
projects and files associated with the currently active OpenWorks
project. You are then taken to the wavelet extraction program where
you can set extraction parameters and make the extraction.

Select Extract ➛ SeisWell.

SeisWell Seismic File Selection Parameters

There are two versions of this dialog box depending on whether you
selected a 2D or 3D project.

SeisWell Projects and Seismic Files

You can use the Search/Filter String field to filter both the SeisWell
Projects and Seismic Files lists. For instance, typing in 3dv in the right
Search/Filter field and clicking Filter filters the list so that only 3dv
projects appear. Typing dip and clicking Search locates and selects the
dip file. Clicking Reset resets the list to its original contents.

The seismic files appears in the list to the right of the SeisWell Projects
list. If new seismic files are added to the project during a session, click
Reinitialize List.

Select lines or traces

Select Line or Trace. You can key in a value or use the horizontal scroll
bar to navigate through lines/traces in the seismic file. Specify the
corresponding First/Last Trace or First/Last Line to display.

Arbitrary Line from SeisWell PD

Toggle on to transfer SeisWell Seismic View window contents to
SynTool through the Pointing Dispatcher (PD). It displays a line
between two arbitrary points (point-to-point) from a SeisWell Seismic
View.

December 2003 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell 234

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Select Nearest
This is the default. Displays a range of traces nearest to the current well
bottom-hole location for the line or trace you selected. This option is
ignored for 2D projects.

Center at Well
Display a range of traces centered on the current well bottom-hole
location for the line or trace you selected. Enter the number of traces to
display on either side of the well. The default is 10.

Maximum Search Distance

Searches for traces within a specified distance of the well bottom-hole
location. If there are no traces found within this distance, you will
receive a popup message. You can then respecify the value. You are
also informed of the actual projected distance to the selected line if it is
within the Maximum Search Distance range. This read-only field is
automatically updated.

Restore Selection from PD

Restores the original seismic section with a default range of traces
centered at the nearest well closest to the midpoint of the seismic
selection sent from SeisWell.

Select the Reflection Coefficient Object

Select the Reflection Coefficient Object to use with SeisWell from the
list of RC objects.

Launching SeisWell From a SeisWorks Seismic Pane

You can also start SeisWell using the popup menu in any SeisWorks
seismic pane. When accessing SeisWell this way, the wavelet extraction
program starts and you can set extraction parameters and make the
extraction. (The seismic project and file were previously selected when
you inserted the seismic pane.)

235 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

SeisWell Wavelet Parameters

Once you start SeisWell, you will see one of the two dialog boxes
shown below, which let you enter the parameters to be used for wavelet
extraction. The dialog box appears differently, depending on whether
you selected a 2D or 3D seismic project.

Center LINE/TRACE of the seismic traces to scan

The center line and trace of the area to be scanned. You may want to
use a different line or trace in special cases. For example, if the well is
deviated, you may want to make a horizontal correction that offsets the
center of the zone of interest. The default is line/trace nearest the well

Number of LINES/TRACES to scan either side

The number of adjacent lines and traces to be scanned on either side of
the center line/trace entered above. For 2D, the number of traces to scan
on either side of the target CDP. The default is 10 lines and 10 traces.

Start time of RC correlation window

The beginning time of the velocity log segment to be used for
correlation. SeisWell compares each seismic data scan to the RCs
calculated for this segment of the velocity log. This start time does not
change during the scanning process. All seismic scans are compared to
the same segment of RC data. The default is 980 ms.

Lag time to first seismic correlation window

The number of milliseconds to start the correlation above or below the
start time of the RC window; a negative value means starting above and
a positive value means starting below the RC correlation window start
time.

Number of correlations for each trace

The number of correlations to be made along each seismic trace. Each
scan is compared or correlated to the RC trace. The scan is made over a
range of data equal to the scan window length (below). The first scan
on each trace begins at the start time entered above, plus the lag time to
the first seismic correlation window. The second and subsequent scans
on each trace begin at later start times that are incremented by an
amount equal to the sampling rate. The default is 31.

December 2003 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell 236

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Correlation window length

The range of times to be scanned for the seismic data. Optimum
window length is 500 to 1000 ms. The default is 500 ms.

Papoulis smoothing window length

The window length used while applying the Papoulis smoothing
function. If changes are required in this value, SeisWell will display a
message suggesting the type of changes to be made. The default is 160
ms.

Extract Along Deviation

Toggle on for SeisWell to follow the deviated track for the extraction.
The default is off.

The RC Sample Interval/Seismic Sample Interval appear in a readonly

field for the seismic project selected. The current sample rate is read in
SynTool and compared to the sample rate for the seismic file. If it is
different, you will be notified of the resampling required to complete
the extraction.

Scanning and Displaying the Data

Once you enter the parameters and click OK, SeisWell starts to scan
the data. A progress bar shows how the scan is progressing. When the
scan is complete, SeisWell displays a diagram showing the results of

237 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

the scan. The example shown below is from a scan of 3D data.

Trace
nos.

Maximum
Line “goodness of
nos. fit” ratio for
highest overall each trace
“goodness of fit” value
(color bar enhanced)

Well location

Lag time of
correlation at
Line which
nos. maximum
occurred

Mouse readouts of displayed data values

Toolbar icons Message area

The resulting diagram actually depends on the type of data being

scanned:

• For 2D scans, the data is displayed as a cross section of a single

line with color-coded “goodness of fit” values. The correlation
with the best “goodness of fit” is marked with an X.

December 2003 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell 238

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

First trace Last trace

First correlation

Last correlation

• For 3D scans, the data is represented as a 3D cube (multiple lines

and traces). The cube is first shown from above (plan view) with
the maximum “goodness of fit” for each trace indicated by color-
coding. The trace containing the highest “goodness of fit” is
marked with an X. This trace may not be the trace you specified
when setting parameters. The trace you provide when setting
parameters gives SeisWell a starting point to scan, in addition to
the number of traces on either side, for the trace containing the
highest “goodness of fit” ratio. To see a cross section of the cube,
you can pick a line. SeisWell displays a cross section for that line
and you can easily page forward or back to other lines.

Plan view

Inline
pick

Cross section view

(similar to 2D)

In the scan diagram, the “goodness of fit” ratio and lag time values are
color-coded based on the chart and color map shown along the right
side of each grid. The top grid displays the maximum calculated
“goodness of fit” values for each trace. The bottom grid displays the
start time of the correlation in which the maximum occurred for each
trace (referred to as lag time). The lag diagram is also important
because it indicates the consistency of the time at which the best match
occurs over a group of traces. You would expect to see constant lag
values in the area where a high “goodness of fit” value occurs.

239 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

In the scan diagrams, the well location is marked with an oval. SeisWell
also provides a color bar to enable you to select a color map to
represent the color codes, as explained below.

Viewing the Cross Section

If you click on the CDP value containing the best statistical match
(marked by an “X”) inside the scan diagram, SeisWell displays a cross
section of the CDP you selected. This is a cross section of the signal-to-
noise ratio of the seismic calculated from the scanned data. It also
appears when you perform a scan calculation for 2D data, pick a line
from a 3D plan view, or select QC ➛ Vertical Section.

Each column represents an individual trace. CDP numbers for each “goodness of fit”
trace are indicated along the top of the diagram color coded values

Each row
represents a
different
correlation start
time used in the
scan calculation.
Correlation start
times are also
listed.

Calculated data
related to scan

December 2003 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell 240

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Color-coding shows the relative “goodness of fit” value along each

trace along the seismic line. As before, the best match is marked by an
“X.” Goodness-of-fit ratios are indicated by color coding, as shown in
the color bar on the right side of the diagram.

If necessary, you can page back and forth through different cross
sections by selecting the Next or Previous options on the View menu,
or click on the double arrow icons at the bottom of the window.

You can also return to the plan view of a “goodness of fit” ratio, lag
time, or both by making the appropriate selections from the View
menu.

Picking the Extraction Location

Once you have reviewed and understand the results shown in the scan
diagram, you are ready to pick an extraction location. To do this, click
on the best match location (marked with an “X”). SeisWell extracts the
wavelet and may display a number of different panels, depending on
your Extraction Option selections.

Picking Additional Extraction Locations

If desired, you can continue picking different extraction locations from

the cross section plan view. Each wavelet that you extract will appear in a
separate spectral display, for side-by-side comparison. Once you decide
which wavelet to use, click OK or Apply in that spectral display to save
the wavelet to the database.

241 SeisWell: Launching SeisWell December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet

SeisWell may display a number of different panels and dialog boxes

once a wavelet is extracted. These let you view, edit, and save the
extracted wavelet data.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 242

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Wavelet Spectra Display & Extracted Wavelet Editor (

Wavelet Spectra
The Wavelet Spectra display lets you make visual and statistical checks

243 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

of the extracted wavelet to ensure its validity. The power spectrum or

amplitude spectrum (upper right) and the detrended phase (lower right)
show the wavelet response over a range of frequencies. The Time
Series (left) shows the actual shape and size of the waveform.

The following controls are available on the Wavelet Spectra display:

• toggle buttons at the upper left of this window let you display or
hide the graph lines, data markers, and grid lines in the display.

• toggle buttons at the lower left let you display a series of different
wavelets, one at a time or simultaneously.

• display controls at upper right let you switch between amplitude

and power spectrum displays, and set the max scale range.

• color buttons at the lower right let you set different colors for each
of the wavelets being displayed. The left column of buttons
controls curve colors and the right column controls marker colors.

• Edit buttons specify which wavelet is the Active wavelet. Click

Edit to move the selected wavelet to the top of the list and make it
the active wavelet.

Extracted Wavelet Editor

The Extracted Wavelet Editor panel lets you edit the displayed
wavelet data shown in the Wavelet Spectra window. You can apply
different Phase operators and apply a phase rotation in degrees. You
can also adjust the lag time (User Lag) and toggle the Wavelet Spectra
window on or off (View Graph). Any changes to the settings in this
window are applied automatically to the graphs in the Wavelet Spectra
window.

Using the Wavelet Spectra Window

SynTool automatically displays data for the extracted wavelet in the
Wavelet Spectra window shown below, assuming you selected the View
Graph option as one of your Extraction Options. Otherwise, this
window does not appear and SeisWell goes directly to the appropriate
Save window.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 244

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Display controls Upper range on scale

The power
Time Series spectrum and
shows the phase spectrum
actual shape show the wavelet
and size of response over a
the extracted range of
waveform frequencies. You
can also view
amplitude.

Select
wavelets Select active
for wavelet
display
Set colors

This display lets you make visual and statistical checks of the extracted
wavelet to ensure its validity. The power spectrum or amplitude
spectrum (upper right) and the detrended phase (lower right) show the
wavelet response over a range of frequencies. The Time Series (left)
shows the actual shape and size of the waveform.

Wavelet Editor Parameters

Along with the Wavelet Spectra window, SeisWell displays the
Extracted Wavelet Editor panel shown below, assuming you selected
the View Graph option as one of your Extraction Options. Otherwise,
this window does not appear and SeisWell displays a Save window.

Statistics
The editor displays the extraction statistics for selected wavelet. You
can then change the following options:

245 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Phase

Minimum Phase Equiv.

Toggle on for the filter to have minimum phase characteristics.
Minimum phase wavelets are sometimes used to tie synthetics with
seismic data recorded with an explosive source.

Zero Phase Equiv.

Toggle on to set the phase to zero for all frequencies.

Dephasing Operator
Toggle on to calculate an inverse, or dephasing, operator for the input
filters. This is used for viewing purposes only; it should not be left on
as the applied filter for the synthetic.

degrees
Enter a constant phase shift to apply to all frequencies in the filter.

Move the slider bar to interactively view the synthetic while rotating
the phase. Enter a value in the text field or click in the zone within the
slider bar column to advance the phase shift in 10 degree increments.

Click on the up or down stepper arrows to increase/decrease the phase

shift by +/- one degree.

Filter Length
Enter a filter length in milliseconds. In general, longer filter operators
produce more accurate results. However, computation time is
increased.

User Lag
Apply a shift in data by advancing or delaying

View Graph
Toggle on to view and edit the Wavelet Spectra.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 246

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Saving the Wavelet to the Database

See Setting Default Extraction Parameters for information on saving
the wavelet.

The wavelet is not affected by any additional wavelet extractions you

perform in SeisWell unless you set Extraction Options to replace
existing seismic panes when extracting wavelets.

TIP: Picking Multiple Extraction Locations

If desired, you can go back to the SeisWell main window and continue
picking different extraction locations. Each wavelet that you extract will
bring up the appropriate windows, as discussed on the last few pages.

SeisWell Menubar

View

Plan View

Plan view of signal-to-noise and lag (3d)

Display the plan view diagram produced by the 3D scan calculation
showing both the maximum “signal-to-noise” ratios for the scanned
traces and the corresponding lag times. For a complete description of
this diagram, see 3D Scans. This option is not available unless you are
working with 3D data.

Plan view of signal-to-noise (3d)

Display the plan view diagram produced by the 3D scan calculation—
but only the portion that shows the maximum “signal-to-noise” ratios
for the scanned traces. For a complete description of this diagram, see
page 241. This option is not available unless you are working with 3D
data

247 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Plan view of lag time (3d)

Display the plan view diagram produced by the 3D scan calculation—
but only the bottom portion that shows the time at which the maximum
“signal-to-noise” ratio occurred on each scanned trace. For a complete
description of this diagram, see page 241. This option is not available
unless you are working with 3D data

Vertical “signal-to-noise” section

For 2d data, this display automatically appears. For 3d data, this option
lets you display the vertical cross section of the “signal-to-noise” ratio
calculated from the scanned data (after you click on the “X” in the
above plan views). For a complete description of this diagram, see
page 243 earlier in this document.

Color Bar
Opens the SeisWell color bar. SeisWell displays the familiar SeisWorks
color bar for a Seismic View.

To specify a color map, select File ➛ Open, then double-click on the

desired color map. Select File ➛ Close to exit the colorbar.

SeisWell Colors

SeisWell reads the colormap set for the screen on which it is running. If two
colorbars per screen are used, SeisWell will use the colorbar for the Seismic
View. Likewise, if a color map is selected in SeisWell, SeisWorks windows
(on that same screen) will use the color map. The color map will remain in
effect for future SeisWell sessions or until it is changed. If SeisWorks is not
running, and no previous color map has been selected, simply select a color
map as described above.

Frame

Tool Icons
Display or hide the tool set at the bottom of the application window.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 248

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Locator
Displays data values as you move the mouse cursor over the display
area in the SeisWell application window. If the SeisWorks Map View is
open, a cross-hair cursor will also appear at the corresponding location.
To view “goodness of fit” values and CDP locations dynamically, make
sure the Locator is on.

Message
Display or hide the message area at the bottom of the application
window.

Signal-to-Noise Display Settings

Message/Border Text
Changes the color of the message and/or border text shown in the plan
view display.

Best Match Mark

Changes the color of the cross mark that shows the highest value in a
“signal-to-noise” display.

Well Display
Toggles the display of the well location on or off.

Well Mark
Changes the color of the well mark that indicates well location, if
displayed.

Tick Mark
Changes the color of the tick marks next to the line/trace values and
color spectrum values.

249 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Grid Display
Toggle on/off to display or hide the grid lines that appear in the plan
view displays.

Grid
Changes grid line color.

Statistical Display Settings

The Statistical display option on the View menu lets you change
various components for statistical test displays on the QC menu.

Message/Border Text
Changes the color of the graph text below the title.

Tick Marks
Changes the tick mark color and ruling lines.

Curve Color
Changes the curve color of curves.

Plot Color
Changes the standard color used for the background in the plot.

QC
The QC menu on the SeisWell main window gives you access to
several statistical displays. These statistical tools are available only

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 250

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

after a wavelet has been picked and saved. They can help you analyze
the validity of your results. These are discussed on the following pages.

Removing “Orphaned” Waveform Test Plots From the Display

When using the waveform test plots from the QC menu, a plot is generated
for the most recent wavelet analysis window. “Orphan” plots result if more
than one plot is opened for more than one waveform analysis window. Use
the motif kill command on the window menu to remove these windows from
the desktop. The OK button will not dismiss these windows.

Normality Test
The Normality test produces a plot of statistical deviation from normal
values for the selected trace.

SeisWell displays a
comment about the
validity of the
statistics shown.

Any significant deviation from the diagonal line between the vertical
boundaries indicates problems with the extracted wavelet. SeisWell
automatically evaluates the results and displays a comment at the top of
the chart. Click on OK to close the window.

251 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

The normality test measures how well the errors in the estimate
conform to a normal Gaussian distribution. If the synthetic is an ideal
estimate of the seismic, then the errors in the measurement (the
residuals) should conform to a perfect normal distribution. This is
commonly called a Hypotheses Test.

The normality plot shown above is a statistical display known as a Q-Q

plot (Q referring to quantiles). The values on the X-axis are the
normalized values of the residuals, plotted in ascending order. The Y-
values are the “expected” error values for a normal distribution. The
data plot are the actual values versus the theoretical values.

In addition to the Q-Q plot, the normality test is quantified in SeisWell

by a measurement called the Cramer-Von Mises statistic (CVM). This
is a modified version of the popular Chi-Squared “goodness of fit”
measurement. Approximately, it is a cumulative sum of the normalized
differences between the residuals and their expected values for normal
distribution.

The validity of a hypothesis test is usually measured by a parameter

called the “level of significance” of the test. This number is expressed
in a percentage, and is a measurement of confidence in the result. For
example, a 5% level of significance means there is a 5% chance that our
estimate is not correct. A 10% level of significance means there is a
90% chance that our estimate is correct. These metrics are computed
for the Cramer-Von Mises metric in Stephens, (1976)1.

CVM statistics below 0.126 validate normality to 5%, and values below
0.178 validate normality of 10% confidence. SeisWell reports a valid
wavelet for CVM metrics below the 5% threshold, as is seen in the
example on the previous page.

Stationarity Test
The Stationarity test produces a plot showing the variation in residuals
over time.

1. M.A. Stephens, Asymptotic results for goodness-of-fit statistics with unknown parameters, The Annals of
Statistics, Vol. 4 No. 2, March 1976.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 252

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Problems are indicated if the residuals show a systematic variation over

time, indicated by one or more of the moving statistics not being in an
approximately horizontal orientation. Click on OK to close the
window.

Stationary data estimates have no dependency on the time lag of the

estimate. In other words, if the synthetic is a true estimate of the
seismic, there should be no systematic change in the errors over time.
Stationarity can be measured in a basic way by computing running
averages of the estimate over a given window, and plotting these
averages in sequence. Non-stationarity features would show up as a
slope in the curve.

The example above, the bottom graph is a plot of the normalized

residuals for each sample in the range. (The values have been
normalized by the standard deviation.) The data begins at the best
match time offset and extends over the scan window length.

In order to help detect non-stationary trends in the data, SeisWell

employs a smoothed averaging technique as described by Barnet and
Fisk in Applied Statistics1. The top three curves are the 79 point
smoothed averages for the Upper, Median, and Lower quartiles of the

253 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

data in the bottom graph. These are the Cleveland-Kleiner statistics for
a fixed window discussed in Applied Statistics2.

In a perfectly stationary estimate, all three curves would be parallel,

and the center (the mean value) would be near zero. Because of the
window averaging, the top graph shows data over a smaller section than
the bottom graph.

There is no stationarity metric produced in SeisWell. It is up to the

interpreter to examine the graphs for trends.

Correlation Test
The Correlation test looks for correlations between the residuals and
the wavelet which would invalidate the model. It is less precise than the
normality and stationarity tests.

1. Gentleman, Jane F., Moving Statistics for Enhanced Scatter Plots, Applied Statistics, Volume 27, No. 3,
1978.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 254

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

If points in the scatter plot are clustered in x or y, the moving statistics

can show strong horizontal trends implying the model is not necessarily
valid. If the scatter plot and the original traces plot do not seem to show
a strong correlation, yet the moving statistics are narrow (measured
against the x axis) and steeply sloped, ignore this test and accept the
match. Click on OK to close the window.

If the seismic is a good match for the synthetic, the residuals will be
small, noisy, and have a normal distribution. They will not correlate
with the synthetic. If the match is poor, the wavelet will be estimated
almost purely from noise (the power of the signal will be smaller
compared to the power in the noise.). In this case, the residuals will
have a high degree of correlation with the synthetic (the power of the
error will be nearly the power of the synthetic.) Thus, a good estimate
should show no correlation between the residuals and the synthetic.

SeisWell measures correlation by two graphs as shown in the example

above. The bottom curve is a simple crossplot between the residuals
and the synthetic data (both normalize with zero mean value). For a
good estimate the data in the lower graph should be a random scatter
centered around zero. The upper graph is a plot of the moving averages
of the data in the bottom graph. (The upper, middle and lower quartiles

255 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

are again used as in the Stationarity test.) If there is no correlation

between the two, the error measurement should be independent of the
synthetic value, and the graph will have no trend.

Wavelet
For more information see SeisWell Wavelet Parameters.

December 2003 SeisWell: Viewing and Saving Extracted Wavelet 256

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Appendix

The term user interface refers to the visual components of an

application and the physical tools (such as a keyboard and mouse) that
allow you to interact with the computer to accomplish your tasks. The
visual user interface for SynTool consists of an application window,
popup menus, and dialog boxes.

This appendix discusses the following:

• Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project

• Printing in SynTool

• Table Editor

• Tips and Shortcuts

December 2003 Appendix: 258

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project

This tutorial uses a sample data set provided by Landmark so you can
become familiar with SynTool without accessing your own data.

The Restore feature in OpenWorks Project Administration lets you

restore project data files. You will use this feature to restore your
tutorial data project.

1. Select Project ➛ Project Admin from the OpenWorks Command

Menu to open the Project Administration dialog box.

2. Select Project ➛ Restore to open the Restore Type dialog box.

259 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

3. Leave Oracle toggled on, then click on OK to open the Restore

Utility dialog box.

4. In the Restore Project Name text field, type: SYNTUTOR. (All

caps automatically appear as you type.)

5. Click on the Instance List pushbutton and select an Instance from

a list of available ORACLE nodes.

6. Click on OK to close the Project Create: Node List dialog box.

(Do not close the Restore Utility dialog box.)

7. In the Read Backup From panel, make sure Files is toggled on,
then click on List to open the Restore File dialog box on the next
page.

December 2003 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project 260

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

You will use this dialog box to navigate to the directory where the
tutorial project data is stored.

8. In the Filter text field, type the following:

<$OWHOME>/SynTool/testdata/*syntutor.oracle.bk

where $OWHOME is the directory path where OpenWorks is

installed on your system. (Do not type $OWHOME.)

9. Double-click on syntutor.oracle.bk.

Syntutor.oracle..bk appears, along with the pathname, in the Files

text field of the Restore Utility dialog box.

10. Click on OK in the Restore Utility dialog box.

A dialog box appears to let you specify the size and location of the
restored project. There are two versions of this window (shown

261 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

below), depending on whether you select Novice or Advanced.

• Novice. Select from Small, Medium, or Large. The

approximate sizes are shown for each selection.

• Advanced. Shows the available locations for database table

space including the remaining space available. You can enter
the desired amount of space for the restored project to be
distributed over each location. A Total box at the bottom of the
window shows the total amount of space you have specified.

11. In the Project Restore dialog box, make sure Novice is toggled on,
then toggle on Small.

12. Click on OK.

The restore process begins automatically and may take several

minutes to complete. After the project is finished restoring,
SYNTUTOR appears in the list of available projects in the Project
Administration dialog box shown on the next page.

December 2003 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project 262

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

You are now the owner of this project. In order for others to use it,
you will need to give them access to it. This is discussed in the next
section.

13. Leave this dialog box on screen. You will use it in the next section.

Granting Project Access

When you first create a project or restore one from backup, you are the
owner, the only person who has access to the project. You can grant
access to other users by selecting them from a list. When you add users
to a project, you can set the permissions so they only can read or write
the data types you allow.

You should have the Project Administration dialog box on screen. To

control user access to the SYNTUTOR project

1. Click once on SYNTUTOR from the Project Administration

Available Projects list.

2. Select User ➛ Manager from the Project Administration menu to

open the dialog box shown on the next page.

263 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

You can view all the users for a project and add them, subtract them,
or modify their permissions, as desired.

3. Make sure Project View appears at the top of the Project User
Administration window (as shown above).

4. Make sure SYNTUTOR appears in the Project text field. (If it

does not, click on the Project List pushbutton and select it from the
list of available projects.)

When you select a project, the lists in the middle of the window
show users who are currently in the project and users who are not
in the project.

The person who

created the
project appears
in the list as the
owner or
manager (M) of
the project.

December 2003 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project 264

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

5. From the Users not in project list, select the users you want to
have access to the SYNTUTOR project, then click on the right
arrow to move them to the Users in project list.

When you add a user to a project, that user is given Browse

permission by default. The following permissions are also
available:

Browse (B) User can view project data, but is not allowed to change it.
Interpret (I) User can view and/or modify project data.

Manage (M) User has read/write permissions and ability to change user
access.
Limited User can view project data, and can modify interpretive data
Interpret (L) (e.g., faults and picks), but cannot modify reference data
(e.g., well header data).

When you create or update a project, a file is generated, listing all

the database tables to which the limited interpreter has full access.
The default list of tables is located in OpenWorks Data
Management, Volume 1, Appendix A, and in
$OWHOME/dat/project/ltd_interp.lst. You can customize this list
by adding or removing particular tables.

6. To change user permissions, select all users in the Users in project

list who will have the same permission (click once on the name to
select, click again to deselect).

7. Select the type of permission from the bottom of the window and
click on Modify.

8. Click on Apply, then on OK to apply your changes and close the

window.

For more information on working with OpenWorks projects, see the

OpenWorks Data Management Vol. 1 manual.

265 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Adding and Setting the Interpreter

You will now add yourself as an interpreter and set the interpreter for
the tutorial project.

1. Select Project ➛ Interpreters from the OpenWorks Command

Menu.

The Interpreters dialog box appears followed by the Select Project

dialog box (if Project: <None Set> appears on the OpenWorks
Command menu).

Interpreters

Select Project Dialog Box

2. Double-click on the SYNTUTOR project to select the project and

close the Select Project dialog box.

3. In the Interpreters dialog box, enter your initials in the Interpreter

text field. Click on Add, then click on Set.

4. Select File ➛ Exit to close the Interpreters dialog box.

December 2003 Appendix: Restoring an (OpenWorks) Project 266

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Printing in SynTool

Select File ➛ Printer Select to choose an output device or file for

printing. The Select Output Device dialog box appears.

Printer Select Dialog Box

Select a device or file and click on OK. Available printer devices and
files are listed.

The list will contain Postscript and PCL5 files/printers and CGM files.
You can modify the list of available printers that appear in the
application’s Printer Select dialog box using the PrintConfig utility.

See “Configuring Printers” on page 6 in the Release Notes for

information on using the PrintConfig utility and adding printers to the
Printer Select list.

Print
Select File ➛ Print, press Ctrl-p, or click on the Print icon shown at
left to display the Print/Plot dialog box. All SynTool prints are sent to
the printer you define in the Printer Select dialog box (previous page).

An example of the Print/Plot dialog box for a postscript file is shown

below. The Print/Plot dialog box initial layout is the same for all output

267 Appendix: Printing in SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

devices.

The selected
output device
(from File ➛
Printer Select).

Example Print/Plot Dialog Box

The fields in this dialog box are described below.

Interval
Set the following parameters in the Interval section of the box:

• Start Time (Start Depth). Enter the top time/depth you want to
use for printing.

• End Time (End Depth). Enter the bottom time/depth you want to
use for printing.

Options
You can toggle the following options on or off:

• Use Color. You can produce a monochrome (black and white)

print on color output devices if you toggle this option off. If this
option is toggled on for monochrome devices, colors will be
dithered.

• Recompute Annotation Increments. This option allows SynTool

to automatically compute all text and grid annotations and provide

December 2003 Appendix: Printing in SynTool 268

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

an attractive display for the scale you specify. If your plot scale is a
different size from your screen scale, you can check this box. If
you do not check this box, SynTool uses the same annotation
increments that are currently shown on screen.

Plot Dimensions
This section shows the total size of the print and the number of pages
necessary to panel the plot.

• Width/Height. The Width and Height shown here reflects changes

you make to the scales, page size, and page setup information.

• Recalc>. Changing the Start/End time(depth) does not

automatically cause the plot dimensions to recompute. After
changing either of these values, click on this button to see the
recomputed plot dimensions.

• Print Remarks. Text you enter here is added to the print’s title
block.

Vertical Scale
Choose a vertical scale option:

• Unscaled, 1 Page. This option assures that a full page print will be
the exact size of the paper defined by your printer driver in the
Printer Setup dialog box. The current start and end time (or depth)
settings will be honored.

CGM Page Size Height

If you have set a very large number for the CGM Page Size Height in
the Printer Setup Dialog, you will get a very large plot.

• Scaled. Select this option to print scaled displays. Type in the scale
you want including the unit of measurement. For example,
5 in/s; 23 cm/s; 500 ft/in, 100 m/cm.

SynTool accepts the following abbreviations for units of

measurement:

ft = feet

269 Appendix: Printing in SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

m = meters

in = inches

cm = centimeters

s = seconds

mm = millimeters

ms = milliseconds

Viewing and Printing Scaled and Unscaled Displays

Using the Print/Plot dialog box, you can set parameters for printing
scaled and unscaled displays.

For example, if you are viewing an unscaled time display and would
like to generate a hardcopy plot at 2.5 in/sec. toggle on the Scaled radio
button in the Vertical Scale section of the Print/Plot dialog box and key
in the desired value.

Actual display scale is set from the Time/Depth Scale popup menu.

If the Unscaled, 1 Page radio button is toggled on, the interval defined
by the Start Time/Depth and End Time/Depth will be stretched or
squeezed to fit the size of one sheet of paper (this is defined in the
Printer Setup for the particular printer).

Horizontal Scale
Choose one of the following horizontal scale options:

• Fit Panes, 1 Page. This option forces all (unhidden) panes to

change their horizontal width so they exactly fit the width of the
paper defined in your printer driver. Using this option, the CGM
page size width you set in the Printer Setup Dialog determines the
width of CGM plots you make.

• Scaled. If you select this option, pane widths are printed at the
exact scale they are shown on screen.

Page Range
Choose one of the following page range options:

December 2003 Appendix: Printing in SynTool 270

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

• All. Select this option to print all pages of a multi-page, paneled

print, or a single page print.

• From: xxx/To: yyy. Select this option to print only specific pages
of a multi-page print. When creating multi-page prints (paneled
prints), SynTool divides the print into panels that match your
printer’s page size.

Pushbuttons
Use the pushbuttons as described below.

• OK. Click on this button to start the printing process.

• Cancel. Click on this button to cancel the printing process and

close the dialog box.

• Help. Click on this button to view on-line help for this dialog box.

• Printer Setup. When you click on this button, a dialog box

appears that allows you to change printer parameters such as page
size, resolution, and paper orientation. The Printer Setup dialog
boxes for specific printers are described on pages 271-273.

• Page Setup. Click on this button to select page margins and the
overlap between panels of multi-page prints.The Page Setup dialog
box is described on page 276.

• Title Block. Click on this button to customize the print title block
contents. The Title Block dialog box is described on page 277.

Printer Setup
The Printer Setup dialog box appears when you click on the Printer
Setup pushbutton in the Print/Plot dialog box. The Printer Setup dialog
box allows you to change printer parameters such as page size,
resolution, and paper orientation.

A different setup dialog box appears depending on whether you chose

to output to a

• CGM plotter (below)

• postscript file (page 273)
• postscript/PCL5 printer (page 274)

271 Appendix: Printing in SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Each dialog box is described in the sections that follow.

CGM Print Setup

This dialog box appears if you previously chose CGM as the output
device from the Printer Select list.

Specify the desired parameters and click on OK. The fields in this
dialog box are described on the next page.

Plotter Setup
Valid units for both fields are in and cm.

• Unscaled Page Width. Enter a width for the plot when Fit Panes,
1 Page is selected as the Horizontal Scale in the Print/Plot dialog
box. This field is ignored for horizontally scaled plots.

• Unscaled Page Height. Enter a height for the plot when

Unscaled, 1 Page is selected for the Vertical Scale in the Print/Plot
dialog box. This field is ignored for vertically scaled plots.

• Resolution. You can obtain the most accurate CGM plot results if
you specify the maximum resolution of your intended hardcopy
device (for most plotters the resolution should be set to 200, 300,
400, or 600; the default is 200).

December 2003 Appendix: Printing in SynTool 272

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Font
All CGM hardcopy output uses the same font. You can control the size
and character spacing by setting the following parameters:

• Height. The font height is expressed in points, where one point is

equal to 1/72 of an inch. Most printed documents use a 10 or 12
point font. The default for this field is 12.

• Name. Select the font that you want to use. The font names that
appear in this list are controlled by the Available Fonts selection.

• Fonts Available to Rasterizer. Most CGM rasterizers support

more than the default mono-spaced font. If additional fonts are
available, SynTool will allow you to select them. These fonts come
in groups as specified by the PIP extensions to the CGM format.

• Font Aliases for Rasterizer. Even though a CGM rasterizer may

support all the fonts in a particular font group, they may not be
called the same names. The Zeh CGM rasterizer refers to many
fonts differently than does the PIP specifications. For example, PIP
specifications call Zeh’s Palatio font Palatino Roman. To ensure
that the rasterizer uses the right fonts, SynTool will use the aliases
for the fonts in the CGM.

Postscript File Print Setup

This dialog box appears if you previously chose Postscript File as the
output device from the Printer Select list.

273 Appendix: Printing in SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Set the desired parameters and click on OK. The fields in this dialog
box are described below.

Plot Dimensions
Valid units for both fields are in and cm.

• Width. This field indicates the width of each panel in the plot.
• Height. This field indicates the height of each panel in the plot.

Orientation
Select either Portrait or Landscape for the printer orientation.

Scale
Specify the scale of the file you want to generate.

Font Pushbuttons
Select either a fixed font (spacing between characters is fixed) or a
proportional font (spacing between characters is proportional). Click on
a pushbutton to see a list of available fonts. Select the desired font from
the list.

Postscript/PCL5 Print Setup

December 2003 Appendix: Printing in SynTool 274

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

This dialog box appears if you previously chose a postscript PCL5

printer as the output device from the Printer Select list.

Set the desired print parameters and click on OK. The fields are
described below.

• Printer. Read-only field. Displays the name of the selected printer.

• Print Command. Specifies the command required to direct a file

from standard input to a particular printer. On Sun platforms, the
most common command is lpr -P<printer> (where
<printer> specifies the printer name). If you are unsure as to what
enter here, ask your system administrator.

• Resolution. Select the desired resolution.

• Paper Tray/Source. Select a desired paper tray.

• Page/Paper Size. Select a page size.

• Orientation. Select either Portrait or Landscape mode.

• Scale. Specify the hardcopy scale for the generated file. This scale
is independent from the scale specified for the Print/Plot dialog
box and in most cases, the default setting should be used.

275 Appendix: Printing in SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

• Copies. Specify the number of copies you want.

• Fixed Font. Changes the current fixed font. Choose the desired
font from the list dialog box that appears.

• Prop. Font. Changes the current proportional font. Choose the

desired font from the list dialog box that appears.

Page Setup
The Page Setup dialog box appears when you click on the Page Setup
button in the Print/Plot dialog box. Use this dialog box to select page
margins and the overlap between panels on multi-page prints.

Set the desired parameters and click on OK. The fields in this dialog
box are described below.

Margins
You can specify a “nonprinting” area around the perimeter of your
hardcopy display. Note that certain printer types, such as laser printers,
require that you must have margins on all four sides. Therefore, if you
set the margins to zero, printing may not always extend to the edge of a
page.

Panel Overlap
Hardcopy output that is larger than your printer’s physical paper size
will be printed on multiple pages. The Panel Overlap options instruct
SynTool to duplicate a portion of each printed page on an adjoining

December 2003 Appendix: Printing in SynTool 276

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

page. This feature facilitates splicing together plots that are made as
multiple panels.

For example, if a print is two pages wide by one page tall and the panel
overlap is set at 0.5 inches, then the right most half inch of graphics on
the first page will be duplicated as the left most half inch on the second
page.

Continuous Feed Paper

Select this option to prompt SynTool to ignore the Panel Overlap
settings on adjacent (overlapped) panels. If you do not select this
option, you will get overlap duplication between pages of a continuous
print even if you have a printer with tractor-feed style paper.

Title Block Dialog Box

Use this dialog box to customize the print title block contents. The Title
Block dialog box appears when you click on the Title Block button
from the Print/Plot dialog box.

Set the desired title block parameters and click on OK. The parameters
are described below.

• Position. Select whether you want to the title block to appear

along the top or the bottom of the plot.

• Show. Select the items to include in the title block. The hardcopy
title block expands vertically the more items you include.

277 Appendix: Printing in SynTool December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Print Troubleshooting

Cannot access PrintConfig to change/add printer selections

The PrintConfig utility cannot be run as root. You should be logged on
to your system with a valid logon id. Do not switch to superuser to run
PrintConfig.

For further information on configuring, changing, or adding printers,

see “Configuring Printers” on page 6 in the Release Notes.

Setting Hardcopy Scale to Match Screen Display Scale

You can set the screen display vertical scale to match the scale you
want for hardcopy output. For example, to set the vertical scale for both
the screen display and the final hardcopy to cm/s instead of in/s

1. Select Scale from the Time/Depth Scale popup menu.

2. Toggle on the cm/sec in the Linear, scaled section. Type in the

desired number, then click on OK.

3. Select Zoom to Sonic’s Extent from the Time/Depth Scale popup

menu if necessary.

To set the vertical scale in cm/s for the final hardcopy

1. Change to a time display (Ctrl-t).

2. Press Ctrl-p, double-click on an output device (if necessary) and

the Print/Plot dialog box appears.

3. In the Vertical Scale section, toggle on the Scaled radio button and
type the same number you typed in the Time Scale dialog box
followed by cm/s, set any other parameters if desired, then click on
OK.

The Vertical Scale units default to the unit of measure as indicated

by the RulerUnits= setting in the .mirarc initialization file
(page 497). To set the default to cm/s, edit this variable to read
RulerUnits=cm.

December 2003 Appendix: Printing in SynTool 278

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Table Editor

SynTool’s Table Editor is used for editing tables of data such as

checkshots or TVD information in a familiar spreadsheet-like
environment. You can get online help for the Table Editor by pressing
the F1 function key.

This section describes how to navigate through the cells in the table and
how to enter and change information using keystrokes or the Table
Editor’s pushbuttons.

Using SynTool’s Table Editor

You can navigate among the cells in the table editor using either the
mouse or keyboard arrow keys. The active cell appears as shown at left
when it is selected or active.

Active Inactive To change a cell’s value, simply type in a new entry. After changing a
cell’s value, press Enter or move to a new cell with the mouse or arrow
keys. The following pushbuttons appear in Table Editor windows:

• OK. Implements any changes you have made to the object you
edited and closes the table editor.

• Apply. Applies any changes you have made to the object you
edited and keeps the table editor open.

• Close. Closes the Table Editor.

• Report. Creates a report file containing the data currently

displayed in the Table Editor.

• Insert. Inserts a new row before the current cell.

(Expert key: Ctrl-i)

• Delete. Deletes the row containing the current cell

(Expert key: Ctrl-d)

• Delete All. Deletes all of the rows in the table

279 Appendix: Table Editor December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Caution: Using Delete All cannot be undone.

Use this feature with caution. You cannot Undo the Delete All function
once it has been implemented.

• Header. This option is available for the checkshot table editor.

Click on this pushbutton to edit checkshot header information
including the checkshot datum. When you click on Header, the
Checkshot Header dialog box appears.

The fields in this dialog box are described below.

— Checkshot Datum. Depths and times in the checkshot’s (time,

depth) pairs are measured from this datum.

— Remarks. Enter up to a 24 character remark in this text field.

The remarks will be stored in the database with the checkshot
table.

— OK. Click on OK to implement your changes.

— Cancel. Click on Cancel to close the dialog box without

implementing any changes.

• Undo. Allows you to back out of edits made in the current Table
Editor session.

Table Editor Keyboard Usage

The following keystroke combinations are available in SynTool’s Table
Editor:

• Space Bar. Changes the use of the left and right arrow keys from
cell navigation to character navigation within the current cell.

December 2003 Appendix: Table Editor 280

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

After selecting a cell, press the space bar to edit text already in the
cell.

• Arrow Keys. Used to navigate among cells.

• Esc. Restores the value in the current cell.

• Enter. Accepts changes to the current cell.

• Ctrl-i. Inserts a new row before the current cell.

• Ctrl-d. Deletes the row containing the current cell.

• F1 (function key). Accesses online help for the Table Editor.

281 Appendix: Table Editor December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Tips and Shortcuts

This section describes a few tips and shortcuts that can be used with
SynTool including a table listing expert keys. As you become familiar
with the Motif operating environment and SynTool, you will discover
more shortcuts.

Interrupting Screen Drawing

Pressing Button 3 will interrupt screen drawing after the next object has
finished displaying. This feature can save time if you have a complex
image on screen and want to change many of its attributes without
waiting for the entire screen to redraw after each change.

Moving Windows
To move a window anywhere on screen and have it retain its position in
order (behind other windows or in front)

1. Press MB2 when the cursor is anywhere on the window title bar or
window border and select Move from the window popup menu
(shown at left).

This menu also appears when you click the window menu icon at
the top, left corner of the application window.

2. Press MB2 again to place the window at the desired location.

To bring a window to the front of the display, press MB1 when the
cursor is on the window title bar, or on the window border.

To send a window to the back of the display, press MB3 when the
cursor is on the window title bar or on the window border.

Basic Unix Commands

Though there are hundreds of UNIX operating system commands; this
section discusses only some of the most common. For a complete
discussion of the UNIX operating commands, see the SunOS Reference
Manual. You can also use the command to retrieve the online help by
typing:

December 2003 Appendix: Tips and Shortcuts 282

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

man <command> where command is the name of the command

you want information about.

Listed in the table below and on the next page are some of the basic
UNIX operating system commands available on your workstation. Also
listed are shortcuts that will help save you time.

Command Function

cat <files> (concatenate) Create a file, Append a file, View a file

cd (change directory) Change to home directory

cd <pathname> Change working directory to <pathname>

cp <source destination> (copy files) Copy a file to a source destination. Example:

cp <filename> <pathname for destination>

find / -name <filename> -print Search the disk for a file of a particular name. Use an asterisk
(find file) on either/both sides if you are uncertain of the name but you
have most of its components.

id (identification) Show current user identification

lpr <filename> (line printer) Send a file to default printer

lpstat (line printer status) Check on requests to printer

ls (list) List names of files in current directory

ls -a List files in directory, including hidden files

ls -l List files in directory, long listing

man <command> (online UNIX manual) Print manual (help) to screen

mkdir <directory name> (make Create a new directory

directory)

more <filename> Display contents of file to fill screen

mv <file> <source destination> Move/Rename a file to a new destination. To rename the file,
(move) type the name you want the file to be at the end of the
mv <file> <source destination string.
destination>/<new name> (move and
rename the file)
mv <file> <file> (change the filename
within the same directory)

pg <file> (page) List file contents a page at a time

pwd (print working directory) Show the current working directory

rm <file> (remove) Delete file. Use caution when using this command.

rm -i <file> Delete a file interactively. Use caution when using this

command

283 Appendix: Tips and Shortcuts December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool User Guide

Command Function

rm -r <file> Delete a file recursively

rmdir <directory name> or <path to Remove empty directory

directory name> (remove directory)

tar (tape archiver) Copying to/from tape drives

Operating System Shortcuts

There are quick ways to type some of the operating commands,
depending on what you are trying to accomplish. There are also some
Control key combinations you can use to control the execution of
commands.

Shorthand Characters
Instead of typing out the full name of the home directory or the parent
directory, you can use a double period (..) to denote the parent of the
current working directory. Type a single period (.) to represent the
current working directory.

For example, the current working directory is /export/home/lgc and you

want to change to the parent directory /export/home. Both of the
following commands accomplish the same thing:

cd /export/home

cd ..

Now, you are in /export/home/lgc/bin and you want to copy the

filename notes from the parent directory into the current working
directory. The following two commands accomplish the same thing:

cp /export/home/lgc/notes /export/home/lgc/bin

cp ../notes .

Notice in this example that we used both the double period (..) as a
substitute for the parent directory name (/export/home/lgc) and the
single period (.) as a substitute for the current working directory
(/export/home/lgc/bin). Since most operating commands involve the
current working directory and nearby directories, use of shorthand
characters greatly increases your typing speed.

December 2003 Appendix: Tips and Shortcuts 284

Contents Index
Syntool User Guide Landmark

Wildcards
Wildcards are special characters you can use to substitute for portions
of a filename or directory name, especially when you want to perform
the same operation on a group of files with similar names. The
wildcards permitted include:

• * any group of characters

• ? any single character
• [a-c] any range of characters, such as a through c.

Typically, wildcards are used to apply a command to a range of files or

directory names that have common characteristics. For example:

ls -al [a-c]*.cl List all files in the current directory

beginning with the letters a, b, or c, and
ending with .cl.

ls -al [a-d]????.c List all files in the current directory

beginning with the letters a, b, c, or d,
followed by any four characters, and ending
with .c.

cp *.rem .. Copy all files ending with .rem from the

current working directory to the parent
directory.

rm ????note Remove from the current directory all files

with filenames consisting of four characters
followed by note. Use caution with this
command.

Control Keys
Various key combinations (shown in the table below) can be used to
speed up keyboard work considerably. These are accomplished by
holding down the Control key and pressing another key.

Combination Effect

Control-C Aborts a command

Control-Q Resumes a command that has been interrupted using Control-S

Control-S Interrupts a command (used with Control-Q to stop and restart scrolling)

Control-U Erases the entire command line (also known as “line kill”)

285 Appendix: Tips and Shortcuts December 2003

Contents Index
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

Index
SynTool User Guide
A entering pseudo-checkshots 170
main dialog box 57-??
amplitude
methods 57-58
irregularities, smoothing 190
Pick the Checkshots dialog box 50
values, saving 147
polynomial checkshots 59-62
ampltude spectrum graph 176
polynomial test report 58
annotation, setting
survey information 158
annotation increments, & printing 268
TD curves as checkshots 168
checkshot diagnostics 167
TD table as a checkshot survey
from Time/Depth Scale 124
selecting 24, 157
log curves, RCs & impedance 138
viewing checkshot effects 169
seismic scale 93
Clear Highlights 149
autocorrelation wavelet 99
color
auxiliary curves 34
contribution plots 116
grid lines 81
B selection palette 81
background blanking on seismic commands, UNIX 282-285
log curve overlays 138 computed velocity readouts 130
synthetic overlay 138 conductivity curve, using as a sonic 32
bulk shift context files
applying 128, 133 most recent listed 63
opening 216
saving 62
C
contribution plots 116
calculator program, starting 78 control keys, UNIX 285
CDP scale location correlation pane
changing 148 best fit with seismic 112
proper 92 curves
Change Well pushbutton 150 copying and pasting 151
checkshot diagnostics deviated displays
diagnostic types 165 overview 43
display parameters 165 display parameters 134
checkshots editing
applying 57 depth samples 140
checkshot datum 280 discarding edits 147
checkshot header, editing 161 discarding, before processing 153
checkshot reports 160-?? log amplitude values 140
datums, editing 159-165 stretch, squeeze & delete depth ranges 142
depth-time source selection 29-31 line style 137
different time-depth sources, using ??-53 mathematical transforms 202

November 2003 Contents 286

Contents
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark

multi-run curves, reading 2 E

objects and types, explained 27
empty scale
process list 153
hiding, scale bars 80
RC sonic
expert keys
displaying entire length 124
Table Editor 281
selecting for display 71
smooth irregularities in amplitude 190
F
D files
2D SEG-Y (.sgy) 222
data, SynTool (read/write info) 2
3D SEG-Y (.sgy) 226
datums
extracted wavelet ASCII (.wvl) 101, 186
change notification 127
initialization file (.mirarc) ??-16
datum elevations 126
SEG-Y 2D list file (.lst) 224
replacement velocity diagram 25
SEG-Y 3D list file (.lst) 228
default SynTool display
SEG-Y index file (.xgy) 96
pane border 71
session (.msc) 211, 215
pane title 70
template (.mst) 211, 217
toolbar icons 67-69
See also SEG-Y files; context files; template
density curve
files; initialization file (.mirarc)
sources 32
filters 40, 41, 175-??
synthetics to show edit effects 119
ASCII 185-??
using as a sonic 54
Butterworth 41, 183-??
dephasing operator 101
Database 187-??
depth and time, change between 82
frequencey bandwidth, specifying 179
depth range
graph of amplitude spectrum 176
and new input curves 150
Klauder 182-??
changing/padding, during startup 55
operator length 175, 180, 181, 183, 184,
depth samples, editing 140
186, 188, 246
depth-time conversions
Ricker 181-??
suitable velocities 206
Trapezoid ??-179, 179-??
deviated displays 43
viewing different filter effects 175
brief overview 43
log curves 137
requirements 44, 45 G
dialog boxes, using grid increments, setting
filter field, using 225 checkshot diagnostics 167
moving 142 curves, RCs, & impedance 139
display grid lines
attributes, restoring current 212 clipping 80
printing scaled/unscaled 270 color, changing 81
screen display, setting 79
interrupting screen drawing 282
distance between traces 44, 45 H
hardcopy
monochrome print on color device 268

287 Contents November 2003

Contents
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

output MiraSystem section 6-9

CGM font size/character spacing 273 OpenWorks section 14-16
CGM output resolution 272 print setup section 13
CGM page size height 269 prints section 12
color, problems when printing 81 SynTool section 10-12
continuous feed paper printers 277 text editng program, using 17
line legibility, improving 137 input curve
nonprinting area 276 changing 149
panel overlap on multi-page print 276 editing, saving, & retaining 144
printing options 267 selecting a new input curve 150
CGM printer setup 272 truncated 150
color 268 interpreters, adding 266
horizontal scale 270
page range 270 L
page setup 276
plot dimensions 269 line style
postscript file setup 273 curves 137
postscript/PCL5 setup 274 line, spike & baseline fill 136
time/depth interval range 268 synthetic 114
title block setup 277 logs
vertical scale 269 See also curves; objects
screen scale to output 278
Highlight M
Clear 149
Family 149 master designated objects
Object and Ancestors 149 RC density 32
Object and Descendants 149 RC sonic 31
reflection coefficients 33
synthetic 33
I Time-Depth curve 28
icons, toolbar 67-69 menus ??-67
showing and hiding 79 cascading menus 66
impedance curve main menu, SynTool
adding from empty scale 194 brief overview 64
initialization file (.mirarc) popup menus access and location 65-??
brief overview ??-6 See also popup menus & commands
CGM section 13 pulldown menus 65-??
color variable names & values 4-6 ways to select menu options 66
customized .mirarc files 4 minimum merge zone, specifying 178
directories, setting misties
context files and templates 9 structural 122
reports 8 velocity 121
SEG-Y files 9 mixed-phase wavelet 98
editing 16 multipliers, applying 189
font information, editing 18 multi-run curves, reading 2
General Transforms section 16

November 2003 Contents 288

Contents
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark

N changing, color
line color 83
northing angle 45
text color 83
note taking program, starting 18
reports, generating 83
selecting picks to display 85
O turning pick lines on or off 84
objects picks
discarding edits 147 tops in SynTool and SeisWorks 85
polarity, reversing 165 Picks_Selection 85
selecting curves for display 71 plot dimensions, recomputing 269
objects and types 27 polarity convention
types polarity, reversing 165
auxiliary curves 34 popup menu options & commands
brief overview 27 a graphical display 134
database synthetic 34 access and location 65-??
Gardner Density 33 Add Overlay 91
master reflection coefficients 33 Calc Sample Interval 132
RC density curve 32 Change Input Curve 149
RC sonic curve 31 Correlation Options 109
stacked seismic section 34 Datum Info 126
synthetic 33 Discard Edits 147
time-depth curve 28 Edit Data 139
OpenWorks a brief overview 139
color names and values 4-6 Block Edit 140
predefined curve types 14-16 Mouse Edit 143
storage of curve unit information 20 Table Edit 140
operating system (OS) window 19 Thickness Edit 142
Edit Process List 153
Extract Wavelet 243
P
Reverse Scale 165
pane title display 70 Save Curve/Save Synthetic
panes to ASCII file 146
deleting 71 Scale Location 147
hiding multiple 74 Scroll Limits 125
maximizing/restoring 74 Show Database Log 134
moving 71 Impedance 194
pane borders 79 Time-Depth Report 130
resizing 71 View Options
unhiding 73 log curves, RCs, and impedance 134
phase spectrum, modifying synthetics 113
Trapezoid filter 180, 181, 182, 183, 186, Zoom to Sonic’s Extent 125
187, 246 printing 267
pick labels CGM page size height 269
adding 72 Example Print/Plot dialog box 268
affected by thickness edits 143 recompute annotation increments 268
brief overview 83, 98 scaled/unscaled displays 270

289 Contents November 2003

Contents
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

See also hardcopy changing 148

process list synthetic overlay 147
quick access 153 scale parameters
processes 174-206 log curves, RCs & impedance 134
filters 175-?? synthetics 113
ASCII 185-?? scale type
Butterworth 183-?? setting seismic 92
database 187-?? setting, for time/depth 125
Klauder 182-?? scale width
Ricker 181-?? checkshot diagnostics 167
Trapezoid ??-179, 179-?? synthetics 114
Generalized Transform 201-?? scroll limits, setting 125
predefined equations 202 SEG-Y files
Median Filter 190 creating
Multiplier 189 from SeisWorks/3D 226
order applied 153 error opening SEG-Y file 97
overview ??-154 index file (.xgy), deleting 96
Polarity 192 output file CDP order
Range Enforcement 206 SeisWorks/2D 224
RC (Reflection Coefficient) 191-?? SeisWorks/3D 228
TVD corrections 197-?? report files (.lst) 95
pseudo-sonic, selecting at start-up 32 SEG-Y format 95
segynum utility 96
Q seismic section
adding 89
quick access popup menu 65 annotation parameters 93
color, changing 81
R deleting .xgy index file 96
description 34
recomputing plot dimensions 269
deviated displays 43
reflection coefficients
about display styles 43
generating, using resistivity 54
synthetic 113
replacement velocity
display location 92
diagram 25
inserting 91
polynomial checkshot correction 59
scale type, setting 92
See also checkshots
showing all traces 92
reports
wavelet extraction 243
checkshot reports 160-??
SeisWell
picks 83
access 234
SEG-Y report files (.lst) 95
colormap selection 248
time/depth reports 130
setting application options 102
resistivity curve, using as a sonic 53
waveform analyses 251
resistivity, using to generate RCs 54
session files ??-216
database changes 212
S most recent listed 215
scale location older session files, newer data 216

November 2003 Contents 290

Contents
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark

opening 216 T
opening as a template 216
Table Editor, using 279-281
saving 215
template files
sharing with templates 219
brief overview 214
session, work
opening 217
checkshot table, selecting 50-157
saving 217
interpreters, adding 266
sharing data with other users 214
selecting well list and well 48-49
sharing, with session files 219
starting 47
text editing program, using 17
startup parameters, specifying 52-56
thickness edits
sonic curves
affect on pick labels 143
output used as time-depth curve 31
time and depth, change between 82
synthetics to show edit effects 119
time datum
with zero or negative values 54
in SEG-Y .lst files 224, 229
startup parameters, setting 52-56
time shifts 128
density curve sources 55
checkshot time shifts 159, 163
depth range 55
computed velocity, derived 129
depth sample interval 56
in TD tables 24, 157
processing options 56
synthetics 129
sonic curve sources 53-54
Time/Depth vertical scale
time-depth source 52-53
datum info, changing 126
synthetics 33
zooming 78, 125
amplitude values, saving 147
time-depth grid lines, clipping 80
basic concepts 38
time-depth table
color, changing 114
deleting 145
contribution plots 116
selecting, for checkshot correction 24, 157,
database synthetics 34
169
deleting 145
time-to-depth curve
deviated displays 113
defining 28
overview 43
selecting 52-53
display parameters 113, 117
transforms 201-??
editing, using filters 175-??
types available 202
multiplier process, applying 189
usage warning 201
objects and types, explained 27
troubleshooting
saving time, depth, amp to ASCII 147
always prompted for curve units 20
scale location, changing
cannot access PrintConfig 278
synthetic overlays 147
cannot adjust scale width 135
tail on synthetic & filter operator 175
cannot open SEG-Y (picked wrong format)
time shifts 129
96
using, to show effects of edits 119
CDP increments other than one 106
viewing in SeisWorks 118
checkshots
wavelet display parameters 115, 116
checkshots not lining up w/time-depths in
SynTool introduction 1
survey 172
brief overview 1
display appears with empty panes 64
edited .mirarc has no effect 18

291 Contents November 2003

Contents
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

edited keynames in .mirarc 4, 16 autocorrelation 99

error opening SEG-Y file 97 Wiener-Levinson 98
error reading seismic projects in SEG-Y cre- guidelines for using 41
ate 223 square root of amplitude spectra 100
gather data error message 106 time varying filter 117
keynames not in .mirarc 18 wavelet length & extracted wavelets 106
seismic scale & resizing seismic 135 wells
session files and templates different well data, using 49
sharing, with other users 219 PD from SeisWorks 49
SynTool amplitudes in SeisWorks 119 selecting 48-49
tops in SynTool and SeisWorks 85 windows, moving 282
TVD corrections 197-?? workflow tips and solutions
editing TVD data ??-197, 198-?? combining two log runs 148
TVD and checkshots 197 copying and pasting curves 151
TVD validation 198 correcting bad values in TD survey 200
flagging time objects as depth 106
U older session files, newer data 216
printing scaled/unscaled displays 270
UNIX commands resistivity, using to generate RCs 54
basic 282-284 screen scale to hardcopy output 278
control keys 285 SEG-Y report files (.lst) 95
shorthand characters 284 synthetics & pseudo-checkshots 170
wildcards, using 285 synthetics in SeisWorks 118
user interface ??-285 synthetics to show edit effects 119
menus ??-67 TD table
Table Editor, using 279-281 for checkshot corrections 169
tips and shortcuts 282-285 for depth/time conversion 168
tops in SynTool and SeisWorks 85
V viewing checkshot effects 169
viewing other wells without exiting 49
velocity log units 21
velocity readouts, computed 130
Z
W zoom function
zooming the vertical scale 78
waveform analyses 251
correlation test 254
normality test 251
stationarity test 252
wavelets
basic concepts 38
converted to depth 115, 116
extracting
frequencies not within seismic 99
output to Landmark ASCII 101
output to OpenWorks database 100, 144
extraction methods

November 2003 Contents 292

Contents
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark

293 Contents November 2003

Contents
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

November 2003 Contents 294

Contents
SynTool 2003.12 Landmark

295 Contents November 2003

Contents
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

November 2003 Contents 296

Contents
Landmark SynTool 2003.12

November 2003 Contents 297

Contents